JP6862397B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player a (so-called pachinko machine).

The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds).
An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round.

In such a game machine, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and some of them are configured to be controllable to a special state different from the advantageous state. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the variable display of one variable display game is stopped in the small hit result mode, the variable display of the other variable display game is forcibly terminated in the result mode. Has been done. Further, it is described that when the variable display of one variable display game is stopped in the small hit result mode, the other variable display game is uniformly interrupted.
Further, the cited document 2 states that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel and can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state. The variable display game of the second identification information has a higher rate of probability variation than the second identification information, and is in a variable display that stops in the jackpot result mode of the first identification information when controlled to a state in which a special state is likely to occur. 2 states that the variable display of the second identification information is in the form of an off-result result (the special figure 2 is out of order during the large hit variable display according to the special figure 1 when the small hit is likely to occur). ing.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-176585

However, when the big hit variable display according to the special figure 1 is performed when the small hit is likely to occur, the interest is insufficient.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for improving the interest in a game machine capable of shifting to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). ) And the variable display execution means (for example, the part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the variable display display result. When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100)) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display and the portion of the CPU 103) in which steps S122 to S125 are executed), a special state (for example) different from the advantageous state is obtained. For example, a variable display is executed with a special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) for executing steps S126 to S128) that can be controlled to a small hit game state). As a game state, a step in a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. A part that executes 011SHS2208), and corresponds to either the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the decoration identification information (for example, FIG. 11-3). Variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1 of (A) and the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2 of FIG. 11-3 (B) is executed (for example, corresponding to the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A)). Te performs variable display of the main decoration pattern 014SHSKZ1, corresponding to the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B) to perform the variable display of the main decoration pattern 014SHSKZ2) it is possible, the special In the state, the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol in the case of left-handed (for example, FIG. 11-5 in the case of left-handed). As shown in FIGS. 11-5 (F), since the main decorative symbol 014SHSKZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed, the main decorative symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is supported. Supports variable display of 014SHSKZ1 It is the second special design that is not done). Further, in the case of right-handed, the first special symbol (in the case of right-handed, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (D) to 11-7 (C), the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol Since the variable display of 014SHSKZ2 is performed, the specific display result is the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which does not correspond to the variable display of the main decorative symbol 014SHSKZ2. Derived display (for example, in the case of right-handed, the jackpot symbol is stopped as a display result of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 11-12 (F). Note that the first special symbol is displayed in FIG. 11-12 (F). The variable display that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the symbol is shown by the stop display of the big hit symbol as the display result of the first small decorative symbol 014SHKKZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-12 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is executed. D) to FIGS. 11-12 (E) indicate that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the variable display of the first small decorative symbol 014SHKKZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol. The variable display of the identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (D), the second special symbol is displayed. Variable display is started. In FIG. 11-11 (D), the variable display of the second special symbol is started by starting the variable display of the second small decorative symbol 014SHKKZ2 corresponding to the second special symbol. when you are) to indicate, variable display of the display results that the initiation (e.g., a display result) of the second special symbol, hand without the said specific display result, it is possible and this to the special display results (In the feature unit 014SH, when the first special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot determination is not performed for the second special symbol, but the small hit determination is performed. Therefore, the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol. In the special state (for example, the second KT state), the decoration identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information can be determined. As a display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit) , the variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed is executed, and the first identification information is executed. And And when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the second identification information becomes the special display result, a special effect suggesting that the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. Execute the countdown effect shown in 11-11 to 11-13 (for example, the first special hit as shown in FIGS. 11-9, 11-11 (D) to 11-12 (F)). It is possible to execute a countdown effect during the period of variable display of the symbol), and the special effect does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information in the special state. It is executed in an manner that suggests the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed.
This will improve the interest. For example, in the special state, when the variable display of the identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information and the variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result is performed. Even so, during the variable display, a special effect can be executed, and the variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information can be used as the special display result. The interest is improved.

(2) In the special effect, the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information in the special state is derived and displayed (for example,). An aspect (for example, FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-) suggesting an aspect (for example, the timing at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol in the second KT state).
12 (F), the mode of updating the countdown number as shown in FIG. 11-13) may be performed.
As a result, the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is derived and displayed is recognized (or generally recognized).
can do.

(3) The special effect is given a game value (for example, FIG. 11-3 (C) and FIG. 11-11).
(D) to 11-12 (F), as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the number of acquired balls obtained by big hit and small hit. Further, FIGS. 11-11 (F), 11-12 (B), and 11-13 (A).
, As shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), the effect may be executed by an aspect of notifying the number of acquired balls acquired by each small hit.
As a result, the given game value can be recognized during the special production.

(4) There are three types of advantageous states (for example, three types corresponding to the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), and a second type as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). There are four types) that correspond to the special symbol), and when the special effect is executed, in the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information. (
For example, when the countdown effect is being executed, the effect corresponding to the type of the advantageous state may not be executed (in the variable display of the first special symbol). For example, during the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (F), the 6R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol (
The jackpot symbol "555" corresponding to (see FIG. 11-12 (H)) is the first small decorative symbol 014S.
Although it is displayed as HKKZ1, it may not be displayed as the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1. That is, when the special effect is being executed, the effect corresponding to the type of advantageous state (the jackpot type of the special figure 1) (the effect of aligning the symbols by the main decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the special figure 1) is not executed. You may do so.
This makes it possible to draw attention to special effects (countdown number, etc.). Or
It is possible to avoid causing unnecessary confusion.

(5) Hold storage means for storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information and information related to the variable display of the second identification information as hold storage (for example, storing information related to the variable display of the first special symbol as hold storage). A first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer that stores information related to variable display of a second special symbol as hold storage, and a hold display means that can display the hold display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, a first hold storage buffer). 1 1st hold display area 5A capable of displaying hold display corresponding to 1 hold storage buffer, 2nd hold display can be displayed corresponding to 2nd hold storage buffer
Hold display area 5B), and corresponding to the execution of the special effect, decoration identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C), main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1, main decoration symbol 014S
HSKZ2) and the hold display (eg, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage buffer,
The hold display corresponding to the second hold storage buffer) may not be displayed.
This makes it possible to draw attention to special effects (countdown number, etc.). Or
It is possible to avoid causing unnecessary confusion.

(6) Hold storage means (for example, variable first special symbol) that stores information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first hold storage and stores information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the second hold storage (for example, variable first special symbol). First hold storage buffer, second hold storage buffer that stores information related to display as first hold storage
Second hold storage buffer that stores information related to the variable display of special symbols as the second hold storage)
And the hold display means capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to one of the first hold storage and the second hold storage (for example, the hold display can be displayed corresponding to the first hold storage buffer). The first hold display area 5A and the second hold display area 5B) capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage buffer are provided, and the hold display means includes the first hold storage and the second hold storage. The hold display corresponding to the hold memory that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information among the hold memories is not displayed, while the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information among the first hold memory and the second hold memory The corresponding hold display can be displayed (for example, in the case of left-handed)
As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the hold display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold memory that does not correspond to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1 is not displayed, while the main decoration symbol 014S
It is possible to display the hold display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the HSKZ1, and in the case of right-handed, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), the main decorative symbol 014SH.
The hold display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold memory that does not correspond to the variable display of SKZ2 is not displayed, while the hold display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2. Can be displayed), and when the special effect is being executed,
In addition to not displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold memory which does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information among the first hold memory and the second hold memory, the decoration identification information also includes the first hold memory and the first hold memory. 2 Of the hold storage, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information is not displayed (for example, when the right-handed countdown effect is executed).
As shown in FIG. 11-3 (C), in addition to not displaying the hold display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold memory that does not correspond to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2, the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2 also has. The hold display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2 may not be displayed either).
This makes it possible to draw attention to special effects (countdown number, etc.). Or
It is possible to avoid causing unnecessary confusion.

(7) The execution time of the special effect becomes longer according to the period controlled by the special state during the execution of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the special effect is controlled to the small hit game state. Since the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped during this period, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (that is, the execution time of the countdown effect) becomes longer according to the period controlled by the small hit game state. ) May be controlled.
As a result, the interest can be improved.

(8) The special effect stops a part of the special effect each time it is controlled to the special state during the execution of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the countdown number is updated. It may be a production (to stop).
This makes it possible to recognize that the state is controlled to a special state.

(9) The special effect notifies a period controlled to the special state (for example, the total time controlled to each small hit game state) during the execution of the special effect (for example, FIG. 11-). 13
The notification effect includes the notification effect (notification as shown in (G)), and the notification effect is the final stage of the special effect (
For example, it may be executed after the countdown number becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 11-13 (G).
This makes it possible to maintain interest until the end of the special production.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in feature part 044IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in the feature part 044IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the accessory control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. This is a display example in the image display device 5 in the feature unit 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the flow of a game in a feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of each scene in the feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of each scene in the feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of each scene in the feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of each scene in the feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the flow of a game in a feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of each scene in the feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode and the like of each scene in each scene in feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode and the like of each scene in each scene in feature part 014SH. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating other production mode of each scene in feature part 014SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. Special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25 configured to include a plurality of LEDs at a predetermined position on the game board 2
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the first hold indicator 25B according to the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2, and the first starting opening switch 2 is used.
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done.
In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction.
The large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). Special variable winning ball device 7
Moved the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball devices 17 and variable winning ball devices 6B
Is located below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member, which extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, in the front-rear direction. The special winning opening and the second starting winning opening are changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 17
In the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom surface member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Execute open control.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed so as to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is open, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened,
It will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a frame LED 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Pachinko game machine 1
When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A by performing a left-handing operation by the rotation operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided by the player, the first special symbol display device 4A performs the left-handing operation. 1 The special figure game is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, how to open the big prize opening (
Multiple types of game states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state (number of rounds and open upper limit period) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls,
A jackpot type with few or few prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. High base state is a special symbol (especially the second
Since the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state,
It is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol lost".
Will be. When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. In addition, it should be noted.
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the frame LED 9
It may be performed by turning off the points and the like, operating the movable body 32, and the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. )
Is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,""is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal to be used, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G).
It is equipped with enerator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5.
To display. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L).
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting an ED signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set the initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.)
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 checks the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
The U103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (.
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
It is sent to No. 3, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 pass through the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is received from various switches such as (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Information indicating the number of winnings, etc.)
, Data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variation state has occurred) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). C
When the PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Also, CPU103
Executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26).
). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, C
The PU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
The process of storing the hold information in the predetermined area of 2 and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to send the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each process of the first special symbol process process (step S)
In 110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the first special symbol normal processing in step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0".
It is executed when (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process of step S111A, the value of the first special figure process flag is ".
It is executed when "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns using. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2".
Is executed when. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing is completed. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed.
When the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, the variation display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing-small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process of step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3".
Is executed when. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (
It includes a process to make settings for (deriving). Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103).
) Determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, whether or not the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the small hit opening pre-processing to the small hit end processing). Judgment), if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process, and if it is not in the small hit game, the second special figure process The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the first
During the small hit game based on the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol,
The process of measuring the elapsed time since the second special symbol starts to fluctuate may be interrupted (timer update is interrupted).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 10
In step 3, step S12 is performed according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
One of the processes 0 to S128 is selected and executed. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the CTC register setting, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of 1 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. It is said. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, the RAM 12
Steps S170 to S1 as follows according to the value of the effect process flag provided in 2.
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in is started, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
Various types of decorative symbols are displayed during variable display, such as outputting voice and sound effects from R, and turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Execute production control. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set content. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. is there"
Update to 5 ”and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
However, the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular Bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression (“high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG. 9-1.
Various control boards such as No. 6 are mounted. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main board 1
Relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between 1 and the effect control board 12.
Etc. are also installed. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and the speaker 8L, 8R, and the frame L are connected to the effect control board 12.
Various production devices such as the ED9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, the board case 21T
It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the M201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly
It is an example of command information addressed to a control board on the sub side consisting of a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. It has a function to output and send control commands as control signals, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by performing lighting / extinguishing / color development control of the normal symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various prize information related to winning is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the display changeover switch 21
It is possible to switch the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by operating the TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, and is used as a game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
Is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 is when the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is open is visually recognized. It is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. Also,
When conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material.
On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, there is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later.
2 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 to determine the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened, and only the clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate the machine 2. It becomes operable. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON and O by a predetermined key.
Although it is a switch capable of executing the switching operation of the FF, it may be a switch capable of executing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED9, and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21
The TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and at least a RAM is built in. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is a payout control C.
Payout control microcomputer 21 with PU21TM371, RAM and ROM
It is realized by TM370 and I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the same are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. 21TM37
0 makes it possible to distinguish between the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is the relay board 21TM07.
It is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via 2.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and the game ball is clogged.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball biting. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 is a ball-out switch 21T.
If the detection signal from M187 indicates a ball out state or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low-level full tank signal to the launching board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the launch board 21.
It is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090, and is a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the launch motor 21TM094, which serves to supply power from the power supply board. The signal to be fulfilled) is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a full tank signal, the launch motor 21TM094
The output of the launch motor signal to is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100.
M380 is built-in. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are serial communication circuits 21TM.
Signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second) to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. ) Is being exchanged (sent and received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, is a signal notifying that fact (reception A).
The CK signal) is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment,
By superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be specified at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM3
When the prize ball payout operation is completed, the 70 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. To do. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. Although the driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, FIG. 9-2
Is omitted.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has an output port 21TM37.
An error signal is output to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via 2c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a.
Is installed, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 has a frequency display LED.
21TM060, ball lending possible LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062 and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal.
A connection signal (VL) between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Signal), unit operation signal (BRDY signal), ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input ports 21TM.
It is transmitted and received via the 372f and the output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
Between TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, the interface board 21TM066
Is intervening. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 has a card unit 21TM050.
Outputs a PRDY signal to. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. Payout control microcomputer 21TM37
0 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer uses the payout control board 2
The BRQ signal is output to 1TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 is raised and the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
The M370 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. afterwards,
On condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
It is supplied from M037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
It is done through. In this example, the card unit 2 is connected to the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse for protecting 1TM050 is provided to prevent the card unit 21TM050 from being supplied with a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate.
That is, when 6 is set as the set value, it is most advantageous for the player.
The smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/30)
You will win a big hit at 0).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/28)
You will win a big hit at 0).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (
1/280) to win the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
, "4", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
, "4", "5", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. In addition, Fig. 9-4
The "probability" shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. FIG. 9-5 (1),
(2) and (3) show an example of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen.
Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 sets the set value specified by the received setting command as R.
By storing in AM102, the mode of the ending effect can be determined based on the stored set value. For example, a character (“B”) that notifies the image display device 5 that the jackpot game state has ended, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends.
Along with the characters "ONUS end"), it is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the stored set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , Each of the cases where the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), FIG. 9-5 (2).
When determining the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3) and when determining the "rainy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), determination values are assigned.

In the effect control CPU 120, the set value specified by the received setting command is "1" or ".
In the case of "2", it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low ratio (for example, 20%), and a medium ratio (for example, 40%). so(
Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in 2).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4".
It was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) was performed at a high rate (for example, 50%). ), And at a moderate rate (eg 30%) the "rain" shown in (3)
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the aspect. Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21).
TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), CPU103
Is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value, for example, 0 to 0.
It is confirmed whether or not any of 5 is met (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, 6 numbers of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and 6 levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (step S21)
YES in TM4020), and confirm whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S)
21TM4040 YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, RA.
It indicates that it has been decided that M clear will be performed. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300.
The detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening of the glass door frame 3a. A detection signal indicating that the state has been detected is output.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. Recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 side has the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The open state can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. And lock switch 21TM
If 051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), it is shown in FIG. 9-7.
Processing after step S21TM4510 related to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode,
Move to. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T).
YES in M4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020)
), If the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030)
), The set value can be changed and / or confirmed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). It becomes. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Step S21TM4 described later without being controlled by the mode.
Move to 760 (send setting command).

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. CPU
In 103, when it is confirmed by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), (3) clear switch (setting changeover switch)
A state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) as described later, provided that the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). It is possible to move to.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition of (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is described in step S21TM47 described later.
Move to 60 (send setting command). Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407).
0), without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 will
The process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area.
If is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103
The process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Also, in checking the setting changing flag (
In step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 is set to step S21T.
Move to M4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
When 103 recognizes the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (
YES in step S21TM4120), confirming whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130)
), The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S)
21TM4140 YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If closed, step S21TM413
At 0, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4).
NO in 130), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140 (N in step S21TM4140)
In O), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. An error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5
Notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) in the image display device 5.
), Then when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), the mode is changed to the setting change mode and an operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is fixed). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop process (step S) until the power is turned off.
21TM420-Repeat step S21TM4220) is executed.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 has a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM420).
After performing 0), by displaying the letter "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc.
"The transition condition for controlling the setting change mode (determined as YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is satisfied even though the set value may not be a normal value (0 to 5). It has not changed to the setting change mode. ”(Step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T).
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

The loop processing period is 4 m on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029.
The letter "E" will be displayed for each s. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing in steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2).
1TM4010 NO), if the set value is not a regular value (step S21TM4020)
NO) or when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030). If applicable, the game should not be played in this state, and the set value is set before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.). It is necessary to confirm the setting value of the storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1)
) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state.
(3) The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. 3
Two conditions are required. The CPU 103 is subjected to these (1) by the determination processing of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140.
) To (3), when it is confirmed that all of the conditions are satisfied, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 must be turned off and then turned on again. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM4).
(NO at 030), although the change of the set value is not allowed, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S2).
Two conditions are required: (YES in 1TM4060) and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4).
030 YES), (1) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S21TM4120).
Yes), (2) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4).
Even when the two conditions of YES) in 130 are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
When it is determined that 2 is not in the ON state (NO), it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Will be.

Next, with respect to the processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, FIGS. 9-7 and 9
This will be described using -8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). Regular value (0 to 5) in the set value storage area
) Is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before it becomes inoperable due to a stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, R
Processing to turn on the backup flag indicating that data will be backed up to AM102,
Data protection processing of the RAM 102 and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S).
Repeated processing of 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or step S21T
If a power failure occurs during the iterative processing of M4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650), step S21TM40 after the power is restored.
At 10, the data check will be executed appropriately.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the set value stored in the set value storage area (0 to 5 in this example).
The value corresponding to is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550).
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is set to
It is set to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Then CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570)
Yes), that is, when the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command specifying that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (step S21TM4650). , Step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CP
The U103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may have been changed (step S21TM4580). The area where the value of the setting changing flag is stored is
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, and the game control microcomputer 100
Can be identified as having transitioned to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and steps S21TM4.
Move to 680. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650).
21TM4590) and the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed.
The period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is from step S21TM4530 to step S21.
The processes of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 will be repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 is judged as YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052
Is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620).
The state in which the above can be executed corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 or step S21TM4130 determines YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 determines YES), and step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 sets the RAM clear flag to 1. It is controlled based on what is set).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms is again (step S21T).
After performing M4530), the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (YES).
Step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560).
Corresponding to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed.
In M4710, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, step S21 is once performed.
After setting 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in TM4710, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. ) That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt is interrupted after the interrupt is permitted. In processing (for example, information output processing), the value of the security signal timer is 10.
The output of the security signal is continued from 00 ms to 0 ms, and when the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM is cleared, the value of the security signal timer is 1).
(When changed from seconds to 30 seconds), the security signal is output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. Will be continued. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 3) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process.
The output of the security signal may be continued from (0000 ms) to 0 ms, and the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process after the output of the security signal is completed.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished.
When controlled to the setting change mode, 30 seconds after the control of the setting change mode is completed.
The security signal will continue to be output until the elapse of. With such a configuration, when the security signal output control is standardized and the setting confirmation mode is controlled,
The output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or is controlled to the setting change mode by executing the initialization process. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

In addition, even when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unclear whether or not an error has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to this mode and is the first after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (0) stored in the set value storage area.
(Any of 5) is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S).
21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 12
If the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is on the 0 side, the player may misunderstand the set value. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. For C
It may be transmitted to PU120. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, CP for production control
It is not necessary for the U120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770).
That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S).
It is determined that the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (step S21T).
M4030 is NO), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is O.
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9
It is possible to notify that the recovery from the power failure has been performed (RAM clearing has not been performed) based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In RAM clear processing, R
The data indicating the game state (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of AM102 before the power supply is stopped is cleared and the initial value is set. , The set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). RA
By the M clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is initially set to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be changed. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it was stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
, (B) When the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520), or the regular value is stored by the operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). And step S21TM4620).
Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
By the processing of 430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21T).
M1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). Production control CPU 120
Then, the initialization process was performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM was cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply was stopped). Recognize. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, step S21TM4 after the setting change mode ends.
The value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in 710 is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds, which corresponds to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), this step S21TM14
Since the process of 65 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set to step S21TM47.
It remains 1 second set at 10.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is 2 m.
It is subtracted by s, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11
A connection confirmation signal is output to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs processing according to, for example, a random number circuit setting program, so that the random number circuit 104 has a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.
Make settings to update the value of.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 determines the predetermined time (for example, 2).
ms) The CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every time. That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this example, 2 m
It is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every s.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one lap (taking the random number for normal symbol hit judgment). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but the process is not limited to such a form, and step S
When the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in 21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (Depending on the state of the frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a)
However, not limited to such a form, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) on condition that the power is turned on (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a).
You may move to.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park, etc., turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on.
By setting the N state and turning the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode and initialize the gaming state (RAM clear). It is possible to execute). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (step S21TM40)
40 or step S21TM4140 to determine NO and not set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200-Step S21TM42
20 loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the game is prevented from being executed.
It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was cut off.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (
Along with step S21TM4190), the game is stopped (step S21TM4200-
In step S21TM4220 loop processing), "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.
An error display for displaying the characters of (step S21TM4210) is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3
Is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) lock switch 21T.
M051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii).
The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21).
If it is determined to be YES) in TM4140, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0)
The display of "E" in 29) is not executed, and the message display ("display") on the effect control board 12 side
After turning off the power, turn the power on again to shift to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
By operating, after changing the set value stored in the set value storage area to the planned set value, by switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, the above (i) to (ii).
If any of the conditions in i) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled.
After the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T)
(Display of "E" in M029) is executed, and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode"). ..

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ")
If this is also performed, it is notified that the game machine is in a state in which the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied after the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a),
Error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM029
(Display of "E" in) is not performed, and the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in a state, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420).
It is controlled by 0 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" in the display monitor 21TM029) is performed on the main board 11 side. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
ES), depending on whether all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, or if any of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied. A different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). The effect control CPU 120 that transmits a command indicating
Then, it is advisable to display the message "the setting value may be abnormal" and the message "automatically controlled to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, step S21TM4 as described above.
It is advisable to send a 190 setting value error error command.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21T
In response to the operation of M051 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a lock switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch. (Clear switch) The setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state). become.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives a lock switch operation command.
And / or, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the operation for changing the setting value was performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode was controlled. Can be specified and notified to that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 has a lock switch 21TM after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started.
Whether or not 051 was operated, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the operation has been performed. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140).
Only when it is confirmed that the three conditions of ,, are satisfied, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21T).
NO with M4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii).
), The RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21TM4) without confirming whether or not the three conditions of) are satisfied.
NO) may be set at 570.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is (step S)
The RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether or not the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied in (YES) of 21TM4030, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (step S21TM4150). The process is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process in step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) (NO in S21TM4570). The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). Then, the set value of the set value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is established,
Workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
In ES), the (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM).
Even if the condition of YES) in 4130 is not satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in this state,
The set value stored in the set value storage area will be changed (step S in FIG. 9-7).
21TM461-10 step S21TM4620).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to set the lock switch 21TM051 to O.
Switching from the N state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T).
It will be judged as YES by M4680).

In this way, when the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM40)
NO in 30), depending on whether the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM40)
30), the conditions for starting the control of the setting change mode are different, while the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are standardized. The conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode are clarified so that the normal game processing can be appropriately performed.

Here, the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the setting change mode is controlled.
It is also possible to give a notification prompting the state. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to surely control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described with reference to -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled.
In this example, when the power is turned on, the set value is set to "0" in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the first setting changeover switch (
Clear switch) Based on the operation of 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and 1 is added to the changed setting value "2". Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Lock switch 21TM05 at this point
1 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, 2
Based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2", and the changed setting value is 1 "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area.
In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the RAM 102 is associated with the start of the setting change mode.
The set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off without turning off 51 (without terminating the setting change mode), the changed setting value in the previous setting change mode is retained in the setting value storage area when the power is restored. It is in the state of being done. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may have been set. In this case, the clerk at the amusement park terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
The setting change mode ends when is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power off state, R
The setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of AM102.
Will be retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the RAM 102 is associated with the start of the setting change mode.
The set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and 9-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is displayed. , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. 21
When TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
The setting value to be displayed in is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes according to the change.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). Without completing the operation to end the change mode (lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off (without the 51 being switched to the OFF state), the RAM 10
The set value stored in the set value storage area of 2 has not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is
The value corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of a control state related to the setting.

The game machine of means O1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
And
Setting change mode control means (step S) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed.
21TM4530 to game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing step S21TM4620, and
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and a game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing step S21TM4650, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
Setting means for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer).
) And
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, 3 from the end of the setting change mode.
The security signal is continuously output until 0 seconds have passed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
It is a game machine of means O1
Initialization means for initializing the game state (step S21TM4050, step S21TM)
A game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in 4150.
The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If RAM clear is executed, step S2
30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in 1TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). In step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102, which stores the setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, step S21.
The process of TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off).
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes 20 processes, and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the game machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (step S21T).
It is possible to send a set value error error command on the M4190 and display the letter "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210).
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The game machine of means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
And
Setting change mode control means (step S) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed.
21TM4530 to game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing step S21TM4620, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on step S21TM472
It is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag at 0.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied). ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
It is a game machine of means P1
The setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM4 at the time of power-on).
Based on the fact that all the results are determined to be YES in 140, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the setting value is appropriately set while avoiding unnecessary error notification. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step S21TM4200 without shifting to the setting change mode)
-Transition to the loop processing of step S21TM4220)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes 20 processes, and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (step S2).
It is possible to send a set value error error command at 1TM4190 and display the letter "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210).
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The game machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
And
Setting change mode control means (step S) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed.
21TM4530 to game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing step S21TM4620, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on step S21TM472
It is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag at 0.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means is used when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (step S21TM at the time of power restoration).
When it is determined in 4030 that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21
TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 2 is in the ON state is satisfied)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, R in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150).
RAM clear based on the AM clear flag set (step S21TM)
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes 1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
It is a game machine of means Q1
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set at the time of turning on the power (step S21TM).
4030 NO), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. Therefore, it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode (the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends)). Specific operation when controlled to the setting change mode (Lock switch 21TM051 is O in step S21TM4680
It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the fact that it has become FF).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends based on the above, the specific information is deleted (step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
Clear the setting changing flag at the timing of),
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the game machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (lock switch 2 in step S21TM4680).
(End the setting change mode based on the confirmation that 1TM051 is turned off),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after it is set is continuously stored (the set value storage area is RA).
It is formed in the backup area of M102, and is a setting changeover switch (setting changeover switch) during the setting change mode.
Clear switch) When 21TM052 is operated, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area will be changed, so even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, it will be changed by the change operation. The set value is retained)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. The set value before being set is memorized (the lock switch 21TM051 is O even when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode.
Since the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is not changed unless it is switched to FF, if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained. Ru)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature 044IW)
Next, the feature unit 044IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 044IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 044IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 044IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 044IW, the variable winning ball device 6 is a hit on a regular basis.
The probability that B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except in the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 044IW is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 044IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 044IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 044IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and in the jackpot game state, the bottom surface member 044IW108 is provided. Bottom member 0 from the closed state moved forward toward the front
By moving the 44IW108 backward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the main feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIG.
Further, it is guided to the guidance path 044IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guidance path 044IW100 is further branched into two paths 044IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 044IW100 is guided to the left side path 044IW102 or the right side path 044IW103. When guided to the left path 044IW102, the game ball enters the V-region 044IW104 and is detected by the V-region switch 044IW106. When guided to the right path 044IW103, the game ball is in the discharge area 044IW1.
It enters 05 and is detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the V region opening / closing plate 0 is located near the entrance of the left side path 044IW102.
When the 44IW101 is provided and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in the open state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 044IW100 enters the left side path 044IW102 and V.
Area 044IW104 can be entered. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 044IW100 is on the right side path 044IW10.
It enters 3 and is discharged from the discharge area 044IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 044IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 044IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, and is detected by the V area switch 044IW106 after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the number of game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 in one round is the first count switch 23.
If it does not match the number of game balls detected by, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 044IW104 and the discharge region 044IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the error may be determined as a large winning opening / exit mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 044IW.
In this feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21 and a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B).
), Count switch (1st count switch 23 and 2nd count switch 24))
In addition to the detection signal from, V region switch 044IW106 and discharge region switch 04
4 The detection signal from the IW107 is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the main feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 has a solenoid circuit 111.
Solenoid drive signals from the game control microcomputer 100 are added to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories, the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, and the solenoid for the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101. It is transmitted to 044IW109.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, FIG. 10-3
And, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values “1” to “6”. Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps
For example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "6" is the case of the set value "6".
It is the highest at 247/65536, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the set value " The case of "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), the set values "1" to
Regardless of which of "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "6298/65536". It is constant. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. In this way, even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value, FIG. 10-3 (A),
As shown in (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be matched by making the probability of loss different between the set values "1" to "6".

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "6" is the case of the set value "6".
It is the highest at 247/65536, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the set value " The case of "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the set values "1" to
Regardless of which of "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "62986/65536". It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value.
Moreover, it is common to the non-probable state and the probable state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even in the case where the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant in this way, FIG.
As shown in -4 (A) and -4 (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be matched by making the deviation probabilities different between the set values "1" to "6".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10). -3 and Figure 10
As shown in -4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the probability of loss is 0 (that is,).
It may be configured so that there is a set value) that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation. For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is, when it becomes 0 (that is,).
It may be configured so that there is a determination value) that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit. For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of losing is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. 6R normal jackpot, "6R probability variation jackpot", or "1"
It is a table referred to for determining one of "0R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the feature unit 044IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the variation display is performed. 9% chance of being determined as "10R probability variation jackpot", 56% probability of being determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 35
It is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in this feature unit 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability,
There is a 50% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", a 5% chance that it will be a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "2R normal jackpot".

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, "6R probability change jackpot" is
It is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature part 044IW, "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6
In the case of "R normal big hit", a big prize is won until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the big hit game or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. The mouth is controlled to be open, and a maximum of 10 large winning mouths can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 044IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" based on the random number for determining the hit type.
, "Small hit B", or "Small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the feature unit 044IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", the variation display is performed. It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), this feature portion 04
In 4IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and 30 It is determined as "small hit C" with a probability of%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 044IW. EX shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n)
= 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. Figure 1
As shown in 0-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also,
The second variation pattern # 02 is also determined when it is determined to be a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 044IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By lowering the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 044IW, the "small hit occurrence frequency" is, for example, the small hit occurrence rate per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example,
The rate of small hits per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In addition, in this feature part 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time even if it becomes a big hit. 5
By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming for the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. in this case,
When executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the low probability shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) / the first KT
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 044IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 044IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG.
The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in -8 (E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the second to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of order,
The second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, low probability / 1st K
When it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the T state are out of alignment, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state,
The second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. Second fluctuation pattern # 07
, # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored.
The second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), the second is the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state.
When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16.

In the feature unit 044IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. Figure 10-
As shown in 8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / 1st KT state is a miss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time ends !!" It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the display. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, in the feature unit 044IW, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this.
Therefore, in this feature unit 044IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 044IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. Figure 10-
As shown in 9 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 to # 21. To.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, high probability / 1st KT
Second fluctuation pattern # 18 with reach even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the state is out of order
May be decided. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. In addition, FIG.
As shown in -9 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is executed. Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), 2 in the high probability / first KT state
When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed after the fluctuation, the second fluctuation pattern # 2
It is determined to be one of 2 to # 28.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, high probability / 1st KT state 2
When it is determined that the variation is out of line after the variation, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the fluctuation time of 1
It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26, which is a shortened fluctuation shorter than seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, the second with reach.
Fluctuation pattern # 27 may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Also,
When the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / second KT state, FIG.
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in 0-9 (I) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation patterns # 29 to #
It is determined to be one of 34.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, lottery processing is performed based on the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern.
Which fluctuation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature unit 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, FIG. 10-11 (
Using 1), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot") will be described. To do. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the first
When the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the round, solenoid 044I
W109 is driven, V area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, V area 044
A game ball can enter the IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

The game ball enters the V area 044IW104, and the V area switch 0 is within a predetermined detection valid period.
When detected by 44IW106, the game state is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 It is a period from when the closed state is controlled again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), the first
When the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the round, solenoid 044I
W109 is driven, and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is used for an extremely short period (in this example, 0.
It is controlled to the open state (for 02 seconds). Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29)
When (seconds) have passed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings have been detected in the large winning openings, FIG. 10-
As shown in 11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again.
The big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is an extremely short opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 (0.02 in this example).
After (seconds), it is set as the period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. Therefore, V region 044 during the predetermined detection valid period.
The game ball easily enters the IW104, and is easily controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 044IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 10-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Also,
FIG. 10-14 shows a variable winning ball device 6B and a special variable winning ball device 1 in the case of a small hit C.
The opening pattern of 7 is shown. Further, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2) shows. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). FIG. 10
As shown in -12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. When the variable display is executed and it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. .. In this feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 10-12
As shown in (1) to 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 0.1 seconds, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. , In the case of small hit B, Fig. 10-13
As shown in (1), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and has a small hit C, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), the special variable winning ball Device 17 is 1
.. It is opened for 8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short. You can hardly expect a prize). However, in the first KT state, FIG. 10-12 (1)
), While the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds, the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side The time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. is there. Therefore, this feature portion 04
In the 4IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 044IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). FIG. 10
As shown in -12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. When the variable display is executed and it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. .. In this feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 10-12
As shown in (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 2.6 seconds, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. , In the case of small hit B, Fig. 10-13
As shown in (2), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and has a small hit C, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the special variable winning ball Device 17 is 1
.. It is opened for 8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
The interval period (closing period) after opening B is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + time before the second start winning opening opening process 2.6 seconds ) Is secured for a relatively long period of time. Therefore, in the second KT state, FIG. 10-12 (2)
As shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), since the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, the special variable winning on the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the ball device 17, and the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening. However,
In the case of small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit R".
A character display such as "USH" is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the small hit type is small hit A to
Although the case where there are three types of C is shown, the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature part 044IW, the variable display of a normal symbol is executed, and the variable winning ball device 6
The process of opening and controlling B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the game control microcomputer 100).
It is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by the CPU 103). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 044IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 044IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, so that FIGS. 10-12 (1) to FIGS. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (1).
) ~ The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that is opened for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12 (2).
~ The variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 10-14 (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, low probability / 1st KT
Of the 50 shortened fluctuation periods of the special symbol in the state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, low probability /
After the end of the first KT state, when the left-handed hit notification is performed, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the variable winning ball device 6B being long open.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 6B, and the probability is low / non-KT.
It is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during the state.

In this feature unit 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 044IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, command 80
00 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are effect control commands for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, the effect control CPU
120 is a command 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H).
When any of the above is received, the image display device 5 is controlled to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. Command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command.
This is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command by 2.
This is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 044IW, the game control microcomputer 1
Since 00 transmits the display result specification command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is the first.
Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is the display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result specification command can be determined. Can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specification command for the first special symbol and the display result specification command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game (
Big hit end specification command: Ending specification command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005
(H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol is not changed, and the command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state.
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the first hold memory is not stored). Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second).
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold memory is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first) that specifies the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background specification command). Command E003 (H) has a high probability of playing / 2nd K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display in the T state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command that specifies the currently set value (
Setting value command). A set value is set in "XX". For example, the set value "1"
If set to, command E101 (H) is transmitted as a set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned effect control command is received from, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the voice control board 13 is changed. The sound number data is output to. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-15 and 10
An effect control command other than the effect control command shown in -16 is also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is
This is the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A,
In the first special symbol display device 4A, the variation display of the first special symbol is not made.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 044IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (the value of the first reserved storage number).
Step 044IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is used for effect control C.
It is transmitted to PU120 (step 044IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 044IWS53A), and the first reserved storage. Decrease the number value by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 044IW).
S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage numbers are always extracted is always the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 044I).
WS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 044IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, the low probability / 1st KT state is determined and the low probability / 1st KT background specification command is issued.
When the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability / first KT, and the high probability / first KT background specification command is executed. When the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off. Is determined to be in the high probability / second KT state, and a high accuracy / second KT background specification command is transmitted to.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 044IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, step 044I without performing the processing after step 044IWS58A.
Move to WS69A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 044IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and step 044IWS59A
By shifting to, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 044IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 044IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58A).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 044IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 044IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 044IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 044IWS63A), and step 044IWS69A. Move to.

Further, when the big hit is not made in step 044IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 044IWS6).
4A). In the small hit judgment module, a random number for hit judgment (a random number for small hit judgment may be used),
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 044IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS65A). Step 044IWS66A). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 044IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 044IW).
S68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). And step 044IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 044IWS69A).
, "0", the process proceeds to step 044IWS75A. If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 044I).
WS70A), it is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 044IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 044IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 044).
Together with IWS72A), the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol is being performed is reset (step 044IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 044IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS75A.

In this feature unit 044IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / 1st KT state) and 50 times of variation display is executed. Low probability / high base state (low probability / 1st KT)
In the case of (state), when the 50th variation display is started, step 044IWS7
It is determined as Y in 1A and S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 044IWS72A and S72B, and the special time reduction flag is also reset in steps 044IWS73A and S73B. ).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

Then, in step 044IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 044IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 044IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 10-7). (Refer to FIG. 10-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 044IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state)
, The game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 044IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is described in step 044IWS1701A,
Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used based on the fluctuation pattern table decided to be used in S1702A and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. (Step 044IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 044IWS1704A).

Further, in step 044IWS1703A, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol
When the determination is made, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts the measurement of the fluctuation time (step 044IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device. The variation display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 044IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 044IWS1707A).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 10
In step 3, first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 044IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121).
) ~ The value indicating the small hit end process (step S128) is not obtained, and even during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) during the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17).
Is not open).

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted.
And, based on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is produced. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 044IWS11).
22A), when the first variable time timer times out (step 044IWS1123A)
), Control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 044).
IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044I).
WS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. 2nd Indicates that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the special symbol.
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
44IWS1127A). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS)
1125A Y) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 044IWS112)
When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (step 0), which is Y) of 6A and does not become either a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot).
In Y of 44IWS1127A, N of step 044IWS1128A), CPU103
Controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 044IWS113).
0A).

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 044IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 044IWS1128A), but in this case, the second
Based on the fact that the variation display of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 044IWS1120A, the processing of steps 044IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer in step 044IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 044IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
PU103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 044IWS).
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (
In addition to step 044IWS2012A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013A).

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, low probability / 1st K
The right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the T state, but steps 044IWS69A to S
By executing the processes of 74A and S69B to S74B, when the 50th variation display is started, the low probability / first KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and steps 044IWS2010A to S2013A are executed. , S2010B to S2013B are executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display is completed.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 044IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 044IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 044I).
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 0).
44IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 0).
Along with 44IWS2018A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2027A.

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 044IW).
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 04).
4IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 044IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. But,
As described above, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or the launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , For players who intentionally perform right-handed operations
The left-handed notification may be performed according to a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, the passage gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and a specific number less than a predetermined number in the second start winning opening and the special winning opening. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 044IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 044IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (the value of the second reserved storage number).
Step 044IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demo display specification command is used for effect control C.
It is transmitted to PU120 (step 044IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 044IWS53B), and the second reserved storage. Decrease the value of the number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 044IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is always extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 044I).
WS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 044IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. However, the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background specification command is as follows in step 044IWS of the first special symbol normal processing.
It is the same as the process shown in 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 044IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, step 044I without performing the processing after step 044IWS58B.
Move to WS69B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 044IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process shifts to step 044IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 044IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 044IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58B).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 044IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 044IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 044IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 044IWS6).
3B), the process proceeds to step 044IWS69B.

Further, when the big hit is not made in step 044IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 044IWS6).
4B). In the small hit judgment module, a random number for hit judgment (a random number for small hit judgment may be used),
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 044IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS65B). Step 044IWS66B). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 044IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 044IW).
S68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS69B.

Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the value of the high base number counter is "0".
(Step 044IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 044IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 044IWS70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 044IWS71B). The value of the high base count counter is "0"
If not, the process proceeds to step 044IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 044IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 044IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 044IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS75B.

Then, in step 044IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 044IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first steps 0.
Perform the same processing as the 44IWS1700A, and confirm whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state)
, The game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, any second for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I).
Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is shown in FIG. 10-8 (D).
) Is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, FIG. 10
The second special symbol variation pattern table shown in −8 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Also, for example
If both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). Then, if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 044IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted.
And, based on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command, display result 2 specified command, display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command, display result 6 specified command, display result 7 Designated command) is output control CPU120
Is controlled to be transmitted to (step 044IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 044IWS11).
22B), when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 044IWS1123B)
), Control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044I).
WS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. The first indicating that it will be a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
44IWS1127B). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 044IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63B. 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot,
Or, if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS)
1125B Y) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 044IWS112)
6B Y) and neither 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, nor 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y of step 044IWS1127B). , Step 044IWS1128B N)
The CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120 to transmit the second forced symbol determination command (step 044IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B).
).

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 044IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 044IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 044IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display of the symbol has become a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126).
Shift to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 044IWS1
When it is determined to be N at 120B, the processing of steps 044IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer of step 044IWS1122B is not updated.
Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is again changed to the bonus control normal process (step S12).
The value corresponding to 0) is updated, and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 044IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss or a small hit, is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. A start winning opening that is not a variable winning ball device) is provided, and the second KT state (small hit RUSH)
In the gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied as described above. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
PU103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 044IWS).
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (
In addition to step 044IWS2012B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 044IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 044IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the jackpot start flag (step 044IWS2016B). Also, C
PU103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 044IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 0).
In addition to 44IWS2018B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of step 044IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 044IW).
S2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 04).
4IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 044IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is,
(If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 044IWS2024B), and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2024B). 044IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 044IWS2026B). And step 044IWS20
Move to 27B.

By executing the processing of step 044IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
Is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if it is a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If it is in the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 044IWS2023B, the second step is performed during the KT state.
When a small hit occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, the process of starting the lighting of the right-handed display 26 or transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed in duplicate.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027B).

FIG. 10-24 shows the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 044IWS2101).
.. If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 044IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 044IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 044IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 044IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 044IWS2106).

FIG. 10-25 shows a gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 1). In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 044IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 044IWS2502). Then CPU10
In step 3, a jackpot start designation command is transmitted (step 044IWS2503), and the value of the accessory control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 044IWS2).
504).

In this feature unit 044IW, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate 41 is played. The game is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

FIG. 10-26 shows the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 044IWS24).
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 044IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 044IW106 is in the ON state (step 044IWS2404). If the V area switch 044IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 044IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 044IW104. (Step 044IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 044IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 044IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 044IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 044IWS2406)
, Or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 044IWS2408)
The CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to control the large winning opening to the closed state (step 044IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0).
44IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (
Step 044IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 044IWS2412).

FIG. 10-27 shows the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 044IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 044IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 tells the jackpot end display timer the time during which the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to (step 044IWS2201) is set, and the process ends.

In step 044IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 044IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 0).
44IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 044IWS2203), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 044IWS2).
204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 044IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 044IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 044IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 04).
4IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2215. In addition, 10R
In the case of a probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability / low base state (high probability / first). It will be controlled to 2KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS).
2209). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 044IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, CPU10
In step 3, the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS221).
0), and further set the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 044IWS2).
211). Then, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (step 044IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
(See 02), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Step 044IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 044I of the second special symbol normal processing
It is judged as Y by WS69B and step 044IWS70A or step 044IWS70B.
The subtraction process of the high base count counter of is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2212), and sets the special time saving flag. To the KT state (step 044IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50".
"(Step 044IWS2214). And step 044IWS22
Move to 15. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 044IWS2215).

FIG. 10-28 shows the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 044IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 tells the small hit end display timer the time during which the small hit end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to (step 044IWS2301) is set, and the process ends.

In step 044IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 044IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
44IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y in step 044IWS2303), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 044IWS).
2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 04).
4IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 044IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 044IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed display 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (step 044IWS2).
By executing the processes of steps 044IWS2304 to S2307 (see 023B to S2025B), the lighting of the right-handed display 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 044IWS2308).

Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 044IW will be described. Figure 10-2
9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 044IW. First, in this feature unit 044IW, low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state))
In), the player performs a launch operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / after the end of the big hit game It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 044IWS2204 to S2).
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, 6R in low probability / low base state
When a probability variation jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the next High probability / high base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (step 044I)
WS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, V during the jackpot game
If the game ball does not enter the area 044IW104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature 044IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the V region 04 during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 4IW104, a high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state) after the end of the big hit game.
The high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / High probability / 1st KT state (high probability / 1st KT state), and high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 044IWS2204)
-S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 044I
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, high probability /
When a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot is The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until it occurs or the 50-fold variation display is completed (see steps 044IWS2212-S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the V region 04 during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 4IW104, a high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state) after the end of the big hit game.
The high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / High probability / 1st KT state (high probability / 1st KT state), and high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 044IWS2204)
-S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 044I
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, this feature part 044I
In W, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 10-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (steps 044IWS69A to S73).
A, see S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the V region 04 during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 4IW104, a high probability / low base state (high probability / low base state) after the end of the big hit game.
The high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also,
When a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / high after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 044IWS2204 to S2206).
, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed has been described, there is a possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game,
It will shift to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, 2R
When a normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high base state remains until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed. Will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 10
When 0 (specifically, CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is in the ON state (step 044IWS5111), the gate passing designation command is issued to the effect control CPU 120. Controls transmission (step 044)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 performs a gate switch passing process (step 044).
IWS5113) is executed.

In this feature unit 044IW, when the process of steps 044IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 044IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Is it in a state of waiting for the passage of the gate after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the jackpot game is started? Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 performs step 044IWS according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 044IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 044IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 044IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 044IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Design process processing (see step S26)
Since it is executed before, the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is detected, and then the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting region is detected. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 044IWS5113): The CPU 103 is a gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41).
It is confirmed whether or not the count value (the number of memory passing through the gate) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1.
The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, the value of the normal symbol process flag is step 044I).
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, it is variable based on the fact that the normal symbol display 20 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display 20 hits and the symbol is derived and displayed. When the winning ball device 6B is not in the opening / closing operation), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed.
If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation processing (step 044IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 044IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 044IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 044IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100).
Is updated to a value indicating (specifically, "0"). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is processed before opening the normal electric accessory (step 044).
Update to a value (specifically, "3") indicating IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 044IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operation time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 044IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 044IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100).

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 044IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (step 044IWS)
5121 Y), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 044IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step 044IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 044IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 044IWS5127). In addition, this feature part 0
In 44IW, in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is decided that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is / 100.

In step 044IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5128), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130. Further, in step 044IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step 044IWS5129), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130.

In step 044IWS5130, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer if the high base flag is set (.
Step 044 IWS5130 Y, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, in step 044IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 044IWS5101) (step 044IWS5133).

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 044IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 044IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 044IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 044IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 044IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 044IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 044IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100) (step 044IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 044IWS3708).

In step 044IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 044IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 044IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 044IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 044IWS5103) (step 0).
44IWS3707)

FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 044IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 044IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 044IWS3802),
The process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS3803). , That is, when it is in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is 5.
Set 5 seconds to the normal symbol process timer (step 044IWS3805). Also,
When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 044IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 044IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device is opened. The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 044).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 044IWS5104) (step 04).
4IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-36 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 044IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the receive command is stored in the command receive buffer, the effect control CP
U120 reads the received command from the command receive buffer (step 044IWS).
612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 044IWS).
613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 044IWS614)
, The effect control CPU 0120 sets the set value indicated by the received set value command to the RAM1.
It is stored in the set value storage area formed in 22 (step 044IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 044IWS6)
16) The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 044IWS617).
). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 044IWS61).
8).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 044IWS6)
19) The effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 044IWS620).
).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 044IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0).
44IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS)
623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 1
20 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 044IWS625).
).

If the received production control command is a jackpot end specification command (step 044IWS)
626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS627). In addition, the effect control CPU 1
20 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 044IWS628).
).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 044IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 044IWS)
629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 044IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end specification command (step 044IWS)
631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 044IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start specification command (step 044I)
WS633), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 044IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end specification command (step 044I)
WS635), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 044IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 044)
IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) according to the low probability / non-KT state (step 044IWS638). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 044IWS).
639).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background specification command (step 04)
4IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a green background image) according to the low probability / first KT state (for example).
Step 044IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS642), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 044IWS643).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background specification command (step 04)
4IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, a yellow background image).
Step 044IWS645). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 044IWS646), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 044IWS647).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background specification command (step 04)
4IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) according to the high probability / second KT state (for example, a red background image).
Step 044IWS649). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 044IWS650), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 044IWS651).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step 044IW)
S652), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter for counting the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state (S652). Step 044IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120 generated during the period in which the small hits were continuously generated in the second KT state in the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition. Small hit continuous middle prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls 1
If is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 (step 044).
IWS654).

In this example, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 starts to be displayed when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the normal state or the first KT state, except for the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot. The display is terminated when the jackpot of is generated (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or higher than any of the threshold values (step 044IWS655). C
The PU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 according to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition (step 044IWS656).
For example, if the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 by winning the big prize opening this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value "1000" has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044I)
WS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter (step 044IWS658). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed. Control is performed to update the number of middle prize balls display 1 (step 044IWS659).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or higher than any of the threshold values (step 044IWS660). C
The PU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 according to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition (step 044IWS661).
For example, if the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 by winning the big prize opening this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value "1000" has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the large winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening 10 during the consecutive small hits in the second KT state, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls for the winning in the general winning opening 10 is the number of consecutive small hits. It may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 or display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120
A process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is executed (step 044IWS662). And step 04
Move to 4IWS611.

FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 044IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). And step 044IWS811
Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 044I).
WS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 044IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (ie,
(If it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (that is,
(If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS816).

By executing the process of steps 044IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 044IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or
Even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed in the non-KT state.

FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, that the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 044IWS921). Whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be judged by. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 044IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, in this example, when the processing of steps 044IWS920 to S922 is executed and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained,
By forcibly stopping and displaying the non-reach out-of-reach symbol, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 044IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N in step 044IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. (Step 044IWS923)
.. In step 044IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are completely inconsistent are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 044IWS924). To check whether the variation display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 044IWS928 as it is. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 044IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 044IWS925).

In step 044IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 044IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, there is no set value suggestion effect in the set value suggestion effect determination table.
Judgment values are assigned to the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect B, the set value suggestion effect C, the set value suggestion effect D, the set value suggestion effect E, and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-39, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-39, the set value “2” The execution rate is the highest when it is.
Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-39, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-39, the set value “4” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-39, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example,
This is an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-39, the execution rate is highest when the set value is “6”. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 044IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 044IWS928 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 044IWS926),
That is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is in the second KT state (small hit R).
The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect suggesting that USH) continues is executed (step 044IWS92).
7).

FIG. 10-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-40, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit R.
Judgment values are assigned to each of the USH continuation suggestion effect B. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-40, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-40, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6".
Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the second
It is possible to raise the expectation that the KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state becomes longer without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. For the setting value suggestion effect and small hit RUSH
The process table according to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 044IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 044IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 044IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speaker 8L) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, 8R) (step 044IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, the speaker 8L,
A control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13 in order to output the voice from the 8R.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 044IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 044IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

If it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 044IWS
By executing step 044IWS930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in 928, the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the out-of-order fluctuation in the second KT state). ), The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 044IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 044IWS932).

FIG. 10-41 shows the variable display during effect processing (step S17) in the effect control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 2). In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 12
For 0, first, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 044IWS8101).
), The value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step 044IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 044IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 044IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 044IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 044IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first symbol determination command). 1 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 044IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control C
The PU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 044IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 044IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 044IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 044 IWS8114).
).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 044IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).

If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 044IWS8108, or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 044IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 044IWS8115). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 044IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 044IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 044IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that
In this case, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 044IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking fluctuation or slight fluctuation.

For example, in the image display device 5, when the fluctuation display of the system small symbol, the fourth symbol, or the like is also executed, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth special symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

10-42 and 10-43 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 044IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, step 044IWS970
Move to 6. In the feature unit 044IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 044IWS9705.
Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 044IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 044IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If is set, the process proceeds to step 044IWS9716. This feature part 044I
In W, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, step 044IW
The stop symbol display flag 2 is set in S9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 044IWS9716 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step 044IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 044IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CP is executed in step 044IWS9703.
The U120 controls the definite display of the out-of-order symbols.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044).
IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS9708).
Whether or not the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 5 designation command. it can. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process directly proceeds to step 044IWS9710.

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, it means that the second KT state ends after the end of the current jackpot game if it is in the second KT state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 sets the values of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits generated during the second KT state and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter to 0.
Clear (step 044IWS9709).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 044IWS9710). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 044IWS9711), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component)
) Is executed (step 044IWS9712).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 044IWS9713).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (N in step 044IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 044IWS9715).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9716). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 044).
IWS9717).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 044IWS9718). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the update. Then, the control for updating the small hit continuous number display 1 is performed (step 044IWS9719).

In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 starts to be displayed when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the normal state or the first KT state, and a jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is displayed. The display is terminated when it occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values (step 044IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of small hit continuous numbers corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition in the image display device 5. Control to display the display 2 is performed (step 044IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times in this small hit occurrence, so the threshold value "10" is reached. The small hit continuous number display 2 indicating that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 044IWS9722). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 044IWS9723), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component).
) Is executed (step 044IWS9724).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 044IWS9725).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N of step 044IWS9704 and N of step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 044IWS9726).

Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 044IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-44 (A), the image display device 5
In, when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is being executed, when the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached, as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (B1) to (B3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed. The set value suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 044IW001,044IW002,044IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B1), the image display device 5 is set by displaying a predetermined character image 044IW001 in a blue display color. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B2), the image display device 5 has a predetermined character image 044IW00 in a yellow display color.
The set value suggestion effect is executed according to the mode of displaying 2. Further, for example, the setting value suggestion effect E
When the above is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 044IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-44, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the second K
Small hit RUS in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the T state (small hit RUSH)
H Continuation suggestion effect can be executed.

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 044IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Then, Fig. 10-4
As shown in 5 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 (B1) and 10-45 (B2), the small hit RUSH is configured to display a predetermined effect image 044IW005,044IW006 on the image display device 5.
The continuation suggestion effect is executed. In this example, the predetermined production image 044IW005,044
As IW006, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed is shown. in this case,
For example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B1), the small hit is displayed in the image display device 5 in a blue display color to display a predetermined effect image 044IW005. The RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, small hit RU
When the SH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced by displaying a predetermined effect image 044IW005 in a red display color on the image display device 5. Is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 044IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS).
See 2019A, S2019B, S634). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the effect control CPU 120 causes a right-handed display 04 on the display screen of the image display device 5.
4IW007 is displayed (see step 044IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2), during the small hit game The right-handed display 26 is lit by the CPU 103) (step 044IWS2).
See 024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, FIG.
As shown in 0-46 (2), the right-handed notification LED3 is operated by the effect control CPU 120.
7 is lit (see steps 044IWS2025B, S634). However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2), the right-handed display 044IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, FIG. 10-46 (
As shown in 3), during the small hit game, the right-handed display 26 is lit and the right-handed notification LED is displayed.
No. 37 is not lit, and the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed.
Is not displayed either.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol will be described. FIG. 10-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R in this example).
In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that results in a probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), FIG. 10-47 (Fig. 10-47)
As shown in A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, step 044IWS1120A, See step 044IWS1128A Y).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol (step 0).
44IWS1128A N, see step 044IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, step 044IWS1120A, See step 044IWS1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (10R in this example).
In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-47 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation of the second special symbol The display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1).
120B, see Y in step 044IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-47 (E). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol (step 0).
44IWS1128B N, see step 044IWS1129B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (F). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, step 044IWS1120B, See step 044IWS1127B N).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 10-48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIGS. 10-48, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1127A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 044IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In the first modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
The 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A).
.. In addition, in FIG. 10-48, the process of step 044IWS1130A is shown in FIG. 10-1.
This is the same as the process shown in 9.

FIG. 10-49 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 10-49, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 044IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B).
.. In addition, in FIG. 10-49, the process of step 044IWS1130B is shown in FIG. 10-2.
It is the same as the process shown in 2.

FIG. 10-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the first modification.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-50 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (N of step 044IWS1127A, step 044IWS112
See 9A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, step 044IWS1120A, See step 044IWS1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-50 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (N in step 044IWS1127B, step 044IWS112)
See 9B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, step 044IWS1120B, See step 044IWS1127B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-51 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIGS. 10-51, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1126A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 2, the processing of step 044IWS1127C is included instead of the determination processing of steps 044IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. ..

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-51, the process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-52 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 10-52, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the second modification, the determination processing of steps 044IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Instead, step 044I
Includes processing of WS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-52, the process of step 044IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-53 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1
See Y in 127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see step 044IWS1127C N, step 044IWS1129A).
..

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-53 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, step 044IWS1120B, Step 044 IWS1
See Y in 127D).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see step 044IWS1127D N, step 044IWS1129B).
..

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 10-29).
The second hold memory is 1 to 4 when the variable display of 0 times is completed and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state.
When there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit in the accumulated pieces, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing by forcibly stopping the game. Further, in particular, in a game machine configured to be controllable to a KT state as in this example, a normal state (low probability /
By performing a right-handed operation in the low base state), the 2nd start winning opening, which is easy to start winning, is made to start winning, and the 2nd special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, while the 1st starting winning opening is made to start winning. 1 It is also possible to have a strategy to display the fluctuation of a special symbol, which is effective as a preventive measure for such a strategy.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification example 3)
Further, the feature unit 044IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-47) is shown, different controls may be used. Figure 10-
54 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIGS. 10-54, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1125B is shown in FIG.
It is the same as those processes shown in -22, but in the modified example 3, the determination process of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. Therefore, modification 3
Then, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0).
44IWS1125B N), CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-55 (A) and 10-55 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-47 (A) and 10-47 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit. If displayed, FIGS. 10-47 (D), (F)
Similarly, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 10-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 10-47 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-55, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly come off and stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), it is forcibly missed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), it fluctuates. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 10-56 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-56, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1128A is similar to those processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variation jackpot nor the 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 044IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 044IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). The process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 044IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 10-57 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIG. 10-57, the processes of steps 044IWS1120B to S1128B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, step 044IWS1128B does not result in any of 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal jackpot).
When the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 044IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 is C for effect control.
Control is performed to send the second forced symbol confirmation specification command to the PU 120 (step 044IW).
S1129B). The process of step 044IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 044IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state).
Although the case where the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the display with the out-of-order symbol is performed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to control to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Also, for example, high probability /
Only in the low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off), the control to forcibly stop and display the off symbol may be performed. In some way like that
Anything may be used as long as it is configured to control the stop display with a symbol that is forcibly removed according to the current game state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the feature unit 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display is possible. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is an outlier symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information is a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) even though the state has shifted to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even if the variable display is a probable change jackpot, it will be forcibly removed. Therefore, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 044IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example
Even if it is configured to suspend (pause) the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and resume the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game. Good. It suffices as long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Also, when controlled in an advantageous state, a specific area (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the V region 044IW104). Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-55 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-55 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-56, 10-). 57). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state).
It is possible to control either a special state (for example, a small hit game state) having a lower advantage than the advantageous state, and the variable means is controlled to the first state when the special state is controlled. Also,
The first starting area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the moving path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is a specific path among the moving paths. A game medium that moves (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. In addition, a specific notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to a specific route (for example, FIG. 10-46 (1).
), (Right-handed notification shown in (2)) can be executed, and when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the specific notification is not executed (for example, FIG. 10-46 (for example, FIG. 10-46). 3
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 044IW, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when the small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special When the variable display of the symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is given, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. In addition, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) and display the variable display of the first identification information. Special display result as the result or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information (
For example, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-46 (1) and (2) are lit) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute a highly likely second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 044IW007 shown in FIG. 10-46 (1)). In addition, when controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (
(See FIG. 10-46 (1)), when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (FIG. 10-46). (2)
reference). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-46 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode depending on whether the state is controlled by the special state or not (they are not controlled by the special state).
For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. On top of that, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B).
To be equipped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. Effect control means to control (for example, effect control CPU 120
) And. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, The right-handed display 044IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LE
Right-handed display 044IW0 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of D37.
It may be configured to execute the right-handed notification by displaying 07.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 044IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. In addition, using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1") having different numbers of specific determination values
It can be set to any of the setting values of "" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 044IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, as a special state, the first special state (for example, the first K)
It is possible to control a T state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-45) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-44) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 044IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to this feature unit 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 044IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 044IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 044IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value,
We try to prevent such problems from occurring.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. In addition, using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, the determination value includes a specific determination value for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination).
And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a variable display display result, and a specific display result and a special display result as a variable display display result. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) for determining that the predetermined display result is different from the above is included. In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (
For example, it can be set to any of the set values "1" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state.
Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (FIG. 10-3).
And see Figure 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-44) that suggests a set value is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 044IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state)
Is controllable. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of set values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, set value "1""
It can be set to any of the setting values of ~ "6"). Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the variable display display result is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, this feature unit 04
The 4IW also includes the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It is disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled by the state).
The variable display executing means is special in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation display of the display result, the update of the first control (for example, the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer) that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the identification information of one of them is interrupted, and the second A second control (for example, a missed symbol) that derives and displays a variable display of one special symbol or a second special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed) and a variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) It is possible to display and stop the symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol), and in the variable display of one of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines the determination result of step 044IWS1128A, S1128B. Step 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed by , S1130B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 044IWS1130C and S1130D.) It is characterized by that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, step 044 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (means A3).
For example, there is a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and is in an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easy to control (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means is provided with a portion for executing step 044IWS2206 in the above.
Based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to a specific state (for example, it is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to be controlled to a non-specific state based on the original state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to the means A3, the specific display result is the first.
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, specifically, a game control microcomputer 100)) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state.
The specific state control means includes a specific region (for example, V region 044IW1) when the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
Executes steps 044IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), it is usually based on the jackpot. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to the means A4, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than that (for example, it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed), and the variable display executing means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the second identification information is variable. In any case of executing the display, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B. -3, see Fig. 10-4.), While the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the above, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 044IWS1128A. When step 044IWS1129A, S1130A is performed. FIG. 10-55 (B).
)reference. ), If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information The variable display of the above is not controlled to be derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-54, FIG. 10-5
See 5 (E). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to the means A5, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It has a higher advantage for the player than the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game ends), and it is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
PU103) includes a portion that executes step 044IWS2206), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 044I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y Step 044IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ), When controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU103) is N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, the process does not proceed to steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the variable display display result is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, this feature unit 04
The 4IW also includes the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means B1) to (means B6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It is disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled by the state).
The variable display executing means is provided with (a part for executing S128), and the special display result is obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B. FIG. 10-3, FIG.
See Figure 10-4. ), The identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example,
The update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is predeterminedly displayed. The second control (for example, the out-of-order symbol is displayed and stopped) (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the out-of-order symbol) by deriving and displaying the result (for example, the out-of-order symbol). The first control and the second control are executed depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 044.
Step 044 IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1128A, S1128B,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, S1130B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 044.
Step 044 IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1127A, S1127B,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, S1130B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 044.
Step 044 IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1130C, S1130D,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, S1130B. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, step 044 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (means B3).
For example, there is a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and is in an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easy to control (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means is provided with a portion for executing step 044IWS2206 in the above.
Based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to a specific state (for example, it is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to be controlled to a non-specific state based on the original state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to the means B3, the specific display result is the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, specifically, a game control microcomputer 100)) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state.
The specific state control means includes a specific region (for example, V region 044IW1) when the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
Executes steps 044IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), it is usually based on the jackpot. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to the means B4, the specific display result is the first
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information and corresponds to the second specific display result, which is more advantageous to the player (for example, is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). During the execution of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modification 3). Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
Is N in step 044IWS1128A, and steps 044IWS1129A, S1
Execute 130A. See FIG. 10-55 (B). ), If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example,
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processes of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E). ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to the means B5, the specific display result is the first
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It has a higher advantage for the player than the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game ends), and it is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
PU103) includes a portion that executes step 044IWS2206), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 044I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y Step 044IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ), When controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU103) is N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, the process does not proceed to steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the variable display display result is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forced loss stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, this feature unit 04
The 4IW also includes the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means C1) to (means C6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It is disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled by the state).
The specific display result includes the first specific display result (for example, the part that executes ~ S128).
There are a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and it is more for the player that the first specific display result is derived and displayed than the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. While the variable display corresponding to the specific display result is being executed, the display result of the variable display of the other identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 10).
3) is step 044IWS1128A, S1128B in step 044IW when Y.
By not shifting to S1129A and S1129B, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), the first identification. A variable display of one of the information and the second identification information, and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on this, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an out-of-order symbol) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) is set in steps 044IWS1128A, S112.
When 8B is N Step 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S11
By executing 30B, the missing symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means C2) In the means C1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is easily given Specifically, step 044 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means C3) In means C1 or means C2, a specific state (for example, a state) different from the advantageous state and more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state)
Step 044IWS220 in a specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, controls to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game based on the probabilistic jackpot). The second specific display result may be controlled to a non-specific state based on the derivation display (for example, it may not be controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Step 04 in the specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a high probability state (probability change state).
A portion that executes 4IWS2206), and the specific state control means uses a specific area (for example, V area 044IW104) as a game medium (for example, a game ball) when controlled in an advantageous state.
Can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) is in step 044IWS2404.
(S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, in FIG. 10-11 (2). As shown in, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, V
The opening period of the area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to the means C4, the variable display executing means is either a case of executing the variable display of the first identification information or a case of executing the variable display of the second identification information. Also, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). , The first identification information is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C).
PU103) is step 044IWS1128A when step 044IWS1128A is N.
29A and S1130A are executed. See FIG. 10-55 (B). ), When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information (For example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not control to derive and display the variable display of the above in the predetermined display result.
The processing of 28B is not performed. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the first
It is possible to realize control in consideration of whether the identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed.

(Means C6) In any of the means C1 to the means C5, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). , Step 04 in the specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a high probability state (probability change state).
The variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and is a second identification when the variable display execution means is controlled to the specific state. While the variable display corresponding to the display result is being executed, the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information (for example). In the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU 103) is Y in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed. 10-56, 1
See 0-57. ), When controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control. The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is
When N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B Step 044IWS112
Does not shift to 9A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 044IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a game machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value shown by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 044IW to enable the set value suggestion effect, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification may be configured to be executable. Further, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 044IW, and a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed or the variable display may be continued by the symbol.

(Explanation of feature section 014SH)
Next, the feature unit 014SH will be described. Hereinafter, regarding the feature unit 014SH, the feature unit 0
Part or all of the description of the parts common to 44IW will be omitted, and the parts different from the feature part 044IW will be mainly described.

The feature unit 044IW is configured so that when one special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation, neither a jackpot determination nor a small hit determination is performed for the other special symbol (FIGS. 10-17 and 10-).
22). On the other hand, in the feature unit 014SH, when the first special symbol is undergoing big hit fluctuation, the big hit determination is not performed for the second special symbol, but the small hit determination is performed. For example, in the feature unit 044IW, when the first special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (step 044IWS57B (YES)) in FIG. 10-21, the process proceeds to step 044IWS69B. 1 When the special symbol is undergoing jackpot fluctuation (step 044IWS57B (YES)), the hit determination random number is called (
You may proceed to step 044IWS58B) and step 044IWS64B.

In the feature unit 014SH, when the first special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot determination is not performed for the second special symbol, but the small hit determination is performed, and the second special symbol is a jackpot. When it is fluctuating, the big hit determination is not performed for the first special symbol, but the small hit determination may be performed. For example, in the feature unit 044IW, in FIG. 10-17, when the second special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (step 044).
IWS57A (YES)) and step 044IWS69A, but in the feature unit 014SH, when the second special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (step 044IWS57A (YES)), a hit determination random number is called (step 044IWS58A).
), You may proceed to step 044IWS64A.

FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-1 (A) is a variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT. Further, FIG. 11-1 (B) is a variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT. Figure 1
The first fluctuation patterns # 01 to # 06 shown in 1-1 (A) are the same as the first fluctuation patterns # 01 to # 06 shown in FIG. 10-7 (A).

In the feature unit 044IW, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol at the time of KT is set to the feature unit 04.
It is longer than 4IW. Specifically, the first fluctuation pattern # in the feature unit 044IW
While 09 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 10-7 (B)), the first in the feature unit 014SH.
The fluctuation pattern # 09 is set to 90 seconds (see FIG. 11-1 (B)). In addition, FIG. 11-1 (
The first fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 08 shown in B) are the same as the first fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 08 shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). Further, the second fluctuation patterns # 01 to # 34 shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-9 are also applied to the feature unit 044IW.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state. 10-29 is a similar explanatory diagram, but while FIG. 10-29 shows only the jackpot due to the main fluctuation in each state with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the jackpot, FIG. 11-2 shows each state. In addition to the big hits due to the main fluctuations in, the big hits due to the fluctuations that are not the main fluctuations in each state are also shown in the figure. The fluctuations of the special symbols marked with stars in FIG. 11-2 are the main fluctuations.

As an example, the transition from the low probability / low base state (normal state) to another gaming state will be described. In the low probability / low base state (normal state), the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is the main fluctuation, and as the big hit of the special figure 1, the 6R probability variation big hit (56% of the big hit of the special figure 1). 10
When it becomes -5 (A)), it transitions to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and a 10R probability variation jackpot (9% of the jackpot in Special Figure 1; FIG. 10-5 (A). ), It shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) and 6R normal jackpot (Special Figure 1).
35% of the jackpot. When it becomes (see FIG. 10-5 (A)), it transitions to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). On the other hand, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), the special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not the main fluctuation, but as the big hit of the special figure 2, the 6R probability variation big hit (50 of the big hit of the special figure 2). %. When it becomes (see FIG. 10-5 (B)), it transitions to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (1).
The 0R probability variation jackpot is 10% of the jackpot in Special Figure 2. The 2R probability variation jackpot is 5% of the jackpot in Special Figure 2. 15% overall. (See Fig. 10-5 (B)), high probability / low base state (high probability /
Transition to the 2nd KT state) and 6R normal jackpot (35% of the jackpot in Special Figure 2; FIG. 10-5 (B))
When it becomes (see), it transitions to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

As another example, a transition from a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) to another gaming state will be described. In the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state),
Special figure 2 is the main fluctuation, and as the big hit of special figure 2, 6R probability variation big hit (5 of the big hit of special figure 2)
0%. (See Fig. 10-5 (B)), high probability / high base state (high probability / 1st K)
Transition to (T state), 10R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot is special figure 2)
10% of the jackpot. The 2R probability variation jackpot is 5% of the jackpot in Special Figure 2. 15% overall. Figure 10-5
(Refer to (B)), the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is maintained (see (B)).
When a 6R normal jackpot (35% of the jackpot in Special Figure 2; see FIG. 10-5 (B)) is reached, the transition to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) occurs. On the other hand, high probability /
In the low base state (high probability / second KT state), the special figure 1 is not the main fluctuation, but as the big hit of the special figure 1, the 6R probability variation big hit (56% of the big hit of the special figure 1; FIG. 10-5 (Fig. 10-5) A) See)
In the case of a transition to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) and a 10R probability variation jackpot (9% of the jackpot in Special Figure 1; see FIG. 10-5 (A)). When a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is maintained (loop) and a 6R normal jackpot (35% of the jackpot in Special Figure 1; see FIG. 10-5 (A)) is reached. Is a low probability / high base state (low probability /
Transition to the first KT state).

FIG. 11-3 is a display example of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 014SH. Figure 1
1-3 (A) is a display example in the image display device 5 when the main fluctuation is FIG. 1.
In the upper left of the screen, the first reserved memory display area 014SHHS1 and the special figure 2 (second special figure game) for displaying the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number) corresponding to the special figure 1 (first special figure game) are displayed. A second hold storage number display area 014SHHS2 for displaying the hold storage number (second hold storage number) corresponding to the above is provided. In the example of FIG. 11-3 (A), the first reserved storage number is "3" and the second reserved storage number is "2". At the bottom center of the screen, a first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the special figure 1 is provided. In the example of FIG. 11-3 (A), the special figure 1 is set in the first reserved display area 5A.
Three hold displays corresponding to are displayed. On the left side of the first reserved display area 5A, special figure 1
An active display area 014SH5H1 for displaying the active display corresponding to the above is provided.

That is, when the main fluctuation is the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the hold display and the active display corresponding to the main fluctuation (special figure 1) are displayed, but the main fluctuation is No fluctuation (
The hold display and active display corresponding to the special figure 2) are not displayed.

Further, "356" at the lower left of the screen is the first small decorative pattern 014SHKKZ1 corresponding to the special figure 1.
"718" at the bottom right of the screen is the second small decorative pattern 014SHKKZ2 corresponding to special figure 2.
The "356" in the center of the screen is the main decorative symbol 014SHSKZ1 corresponding to the special figure 1.

That is, when the main variation is the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the main decorative symbol corresponding to the main variation (special figure 1) is displayed.

FIG. 11-3 (B) is a display example in the image display device 5 when the main variation is the special figure 2 (except when the countdown effect described later is executed). In the upper left of the screen, the first reserved storage number display area 014SHHS1 and the special figure 2 (second special figure game) for displaying the reserved storage number (first reserved storage number) corresponding to the special figure 1 (first special figure game) are displayed. The number of pending storages corresponding to
A second hold storage number display area 014SHHS2 for displaying the second hold storage number) is provided. In the example of FIG. 11-3 (B), the first reserved storage number is "3" and the second reserved storage number is "2". A second hold display area 5B for displaying the hold display corresponding to the special figure 2 is provided at the lower center of the screen. In the example of FIG. 11-3 (B), the second reserved display area 5B is the 2 corresponding to the special figure 2.
The hold display is displayed. On the left side of the second hold display area 5B, an active display area 014SH5H2 for displaying the active display corresponding to the special figure 2 is provided.

That is, when the main fluctuation is the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), the hold display and the active display corresponding to the main fluctuation (special figure 2) are displayed, but the main fluctuation is No fluctuation (
The hold display and active display corresponding to the special figure 1) are not displayed. Since the main fluctuation is shown in Special Figure 2, the right-handed display 014SH007 is displayed.

Further, "356" at the lower left of the screen is the first small decorative pattern 014SHKKZ1 corresponding to the special figure 1.
"718" at the bottom right of the screen is the second small decorative pattern 014SHKKZ2 corresponding to special figure 2.
The "718" in the center of the screen is the main decorative symbol 014SHSKZ2 corresponding to the special figure 2.

That is, when the main variation is the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), the main decorative symbol corresponding to the main variation (special figure 2) is displayed.

FIG. 11-3 (C) is a display example in the image display device 5 when the countdown effect (described later) is being executed. The countdown effect is executed when the main fluctuation is the special figure 2, but when the countdown effect is executed even when the main fluctuation is the special figure 2, FIG. 11-3 (Fig. 11-3). The display is as shown in C). In the upper left of the screen, the first reserved memory display area 014SHHS1 and the special figure 2 (second special figure game) for displaying the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number) corresponding to the special figure 1 (first special figure game) are displayed. A second hold storage number display area 014SHHS2 for displaying the hold storage number (second hold storage number) corresponding to the above is provided. In the example of FIG. 11-3 (C), the first reserved storage number is "3" and the second reserved storage number is "2". 1st reserved storage number display area 014SHHS1 and 2nd reserved storage number display area 014SHH
On the lower side of S2, the number of acquired balls display area 014SHKT that displays the total number of acquired balls (number of prize balls)
S is provided. In the example of FIG. 11-3 (C), "1350 (points)" corresponding to the cumulative number of acquired balls by the big hit and the small hit is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 014SHKTS.

In addition, "↓↓↓" at the bottom left of the screen is the first small decorative pattern 014SHKKZ1 corresponding to special figure 1.
"718" at the bottom right of the screen is the second small decorative pattern 014SHKKZ2 corresponding to special figure 2.
Is. "28" in the center of the screen is the countdown number 014SH due to the countdown effect.
CDS (a number indicating the number of remaining seconds, etc.).

That is, when the countdown effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C), the hold display, the active display, and the main decoration symbol are not displayed. Since the countdown effect is executed when the main fluctuation is FIG. 2, the right-handed display 014SH007 is displayed when the countdown effect is executed.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the game in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-4 shows a normal state to a jackpot game state (MUMU BONUS).
-Second KT state (MUMU RUSH) -The flow of the jackpot game state is shown. In the feature unit 014SH, the effect in the big hit game state is referred to as "MUMU BONUS". Further, the effect in the second KT state (excluding the case where the countdown effect is executed) is referred to as "MUMU RUSH".

In FIG. 11-4, the time changes from left to right. In FIG. 11-4, the top row shows how to hit (left-handed, right-handed). The one below the way of hitting shows the game state and the like. 1 such as game status
The following shows the state of fluctuation in Special Figure 1. The state of the change in the special figure 1 is shown below the state of the change in the special figure 2. The state of the change of the special figure 2 below shows the state of the operation of the special variable winning ball device 7. Below the state of operation of the special variable winning ball device 7, the state of operation of the special variable winning ball device 17 is shown. The same applies to FIG. 11-9 (described later).

11-5 to 11-7 are explanatory views for explaining the production mode and the like of each scene in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7 relate to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 11-4, and FIGS. 11-5 (A) → 11-5 (B), ... , Figure 11-5 (
G) → FIG. 11-5 (H) → FIG. 11-6 (A) → FIG. 11-6 (B), ..., FIG. 11-6 (G)
→ FIG. 11-6 (H) → FIG. 11-7 (A) → FIG. 11-7 (B), ..., FIG. 11-7 (F) → FIG. 11-7 (G).

As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the normal state, the left-handed strike is performed and the variation of the special figure 1 is performed.
In the case of a big hit in Special Figure 1 (see (a) in FIG. 11-4), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 41 by right-handed hitting (see the gate passage waiting process in FIG. 10-25). (See), the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened (see (b) in FIG. 11-4). In other words, it will be in a big hit game state where it is digested by hitting right. During the jackpot game state, both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are reset (see step 044IW2502 in FIG. 10-25). The type of jackpot is assumed to be a 10R probability variation jackpot. Further, as shown in the figure, at the end of the big hit game state, there is no hold that becomes the big hit of the special figure 1. More specifically, at the end of the jackpot game state, the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) in Special Figure 1 is 1 (one pending hold is lost), and the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2 (second reserved number). The number of memories) is assumed to be 4 (held during the jackpot game state).

FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a scene immediately before the hold display 014SH5A1 (off) of the special figure 1 is digested. In addition, in FIG. 11-5 (A), the main decorative symbol “54
"7" and the first small decoration symbol "547" are display results corresponding to the hold display of the last digested special figure 1, and the second small decoration symbol "864" is the last digested special figure 2 This is the display result corresponding to the hold display of.

In FIG. 11-5 (B), the hold display 014SH5A1 (off) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the variable display of the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol corresponding to the hold display 014SH5A1 of the special figure 1 (
It shows the scene where the out-of-order fluctuation) is performed. FIG. 11-5 (C) shows the display results.
It shows a scene in which the stop display of the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol (stop display of the out-of-order symbol "633") is performed.

In FIG. 11-5 (D), the hold display 014SH5A2 (big hit) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the variable display of the main decoration symbol and the first small decoration symbol corresponding to the hold display 014SH5A2 of the special figure 1 (
It shows the scene where the jackpot fluctuation) is being performed. In FIG. 11-5 (E), when the ball is in reach (or before it reaches reach), the game ball wins the first starting winning opening of the winning ball device 6A, and the hold display 014SH5A3 (in FIG. 1) is shown. (Outside) indicates the scene where it is additionally displayed. In FIG. 11-5 (F), as a display result, a stop display of the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol (stop display of the jackpot symbol “777”) is performed (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (Scene corresponding to (a)) is shown.

FIG. 11-5 (G) shows a scene of waiting for the gate to pass. FIG. 11-5 (H) shows a scene in which the type of jackpot is notified. In the example of FIG. 11-5 (H), the 10R probability variation jackpot (SPECIAL MUMU BONUS) is notified as the type of jackpot.

FIG. 11-6 (A) shows a scene during the jackpot game state (that is, a scene corresponding to (b) in FIG. 11-4). FIG. 11-6 (B) shows a scene at the end of the jackpot game state. In FIG. 11-6 (B), "this time: 1560 points" indicates the number of balls acquired by the big hit this time, and "total: 1560 points" indicates the cumulative number of balls acquired by the big hit and the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, after the jackpot game state is completed, the player is in the second KT state, which is digested by right-handed hitting. That is, since the 10R probability variation jackpot was obtained when the gaming state was the normal state, the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (FIG. 11-).
2). In the 2nd KT state (except during the jackpot fluctuation in Special Figure 1), "MUMU" is used as a production.
RUSH ”is performed. In the second KT state (during the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1), a "countdown effect" is performed instead of "MUMU RUSH" as an effect in the second KT state (see FIGS. 11-9 to 11-13).

As shown in FIG. 11-4, in the second KT state, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is mainly performed, and when a small hit occurs (see (c) and (e) in FIG. 11-4), a special case occurs. The variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (see (d) and (f) in FIG. 11-4). In other words, it will be in a small hit game state where it is digested by hitting right. Further, in the second KT state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is mainly performed, but as described above, at the end of the big hit game state, in addition to the hold of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is also held, so that the special figure 1 is held. Fluctuations are also made. Specifically, since there is one hold that is out of the hold of special figure 1, the fluctuation of special figure 1 due to the hold is out of place (see (g) in FIG. 11-4). As shown in the figure, the period during which the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (0.8 seconds or 1).
.. 8 seconds. In FIGS. 10-6 (B), 10-13, and 10-14), the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped (see FIG. 10-19), so that the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state. As a result, the time for displaying the fluctuation start to stop of the special figure 1 becomes longer by the period of time. In particular,
The time from the start to the stop display of the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 1 is longer than the time of 2 seconds (not shown) of the first fluctuation pattern # 07 in FIG. 11-1 (B).

FIG. 11-6 (C) shows a low probability / low base state (second KT state (MUMU RUSH)).
It shows the scene of notifying the transition to.

11-6 (D) shows the variable display (disengagement variation) of the first small decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 (the amount held at the end of the big hit game state which is hidden), and the hold of the special figure 2. It shows a scene in which a variable display (small hit variation) of the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol corresponding to the display is performed.

In FIG. 11-6 (E), as a display result, a stop display of the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol (stop display of the small hit symbol “135”) is performed (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (Scene corresponding to (c)) is shown. In FIG. 11-6 (E), the character on the right side notifies a small hit. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (E), the first small decorative symbol remains in the variable display. In FIG. 11-6 (F), the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (
(See (d) in FIG. 11-4) shows a scene in which a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17. In addition, in FIG. 11-6 (F), the upper right "done" informs the above winning (for example, one winning), and the upper left "+10 points" is the above winning (for example, one winning). It informs the number of balls acquired by. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (F), the first small decorative symbol remains in the variable display.

As a display result, FIG. 11-6 (G) shows a stop display of the first small decorative symbol (off symbol "45".
2 ”is a stop display) (that is, the scene corresponding to (g) in Fig. 11-4)
Is shown.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 (G) also shows a scene in which the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol are variably displayed (small hit variation) corresponding to the next hold display of the special figure 2. .. In addition, FIG. 11-6
As shown in (G), the number of acquired balls has been updated to "1570 points".

In FIG. 11-6 (H), as a display result, a stop display of the main decoration symbol and the second small decoration symbol (stop display of the small hit symbol “135”) is performed (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (Scene corresponding to (e)) is shown. In FIG. 11-6 (H), the character on the right side notifies a small hit. FIG. 11-7 (A) shows a scene in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (see (f) in FIG. 11-4) and the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17. In addition, in FIG. 11-7 (A), "lucky!" In the upper right is the above prize (for example, 2).
The number of balls won by the above-mentioned winning (for example, two winnings) is notified by "+20 points" on the upper left.

In the second KT state, there is a high probability that Special Figure 2 will win a small hit (specifically, Figure 10-4 (B).
) 62896/65536), because the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a small hit is also short (specifically,
In the second fluctuation pattern # 32 (1.5 seconds, or the second fluctuation pattern # 33 (5 seconds)) and the second KT state (MUMU RUSH) shown in FIG. It becomes a small hit (see (c) (e) in FIG. 11-4, FIG. 11-6 (E), and FIG. 11-6 (H)).
, The special variable winning ball device 17 in the open state can be made to win a game ball (FIG. 11).
(D) (f) in -4, FIGS. 11-6 (F), 11-7 (A)).

As shown in Fig. 11-4, when a big hit is made in Special Fig. 2, (i in Fig. 11-4)
), The special variable winning ball device 7 is opened based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 41 by hitting right (see the gate passage waiting process in FIG. 10-25). That is, it becomes a big hit game state. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is 2 minutes (second fluctuation pattern # 34 shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), (h) in FIG. 11-4).

FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a scene in which the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol are variably displayed (big hit variation) corresponding to the hold display of the special figure 2 (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (H) is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 11-7 (B), a battle effect by a character is performed, and the effect mode is different depending on whether or not the battle effect is a big hit and the type of the big hit. In the feature unit 014SH, in the case of a big hit (in the case of a big hit fluctuation), the production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is decided (the production mode in which the ally character wins the battle or the production mode in which the ally character loses the battle) is set as the big hit. If this is not the case (in the case of out-of-order fluctuations, etc.), the production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is not decided (the production mode in which the battle is a draw, the production mode in which one character escapes, the production mode in which the character fades out in the middle of the production, etc.) There is. In addition, in the case of a jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, a 10R probability variation jackpot, see FIG. 11-2), the player character is set to win the battle as a production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is determined. A big hit that is not very advantageous for (for example, a 2R normal big hit. FIG. 1
In the case of (see 1-2), the production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is determined is the production mode in which the ally character loses the battle.

In FIG. 11-7 (C), as a display result, a stop display of the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol (stop display of the jackpot symbol “777”) is performed (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (Scene corresponding to (i)) is shown.

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows a scene of waiting for the gate to pass. FIG. 11-7 (E) shows a scene in which the type of jackpot is notified. In the example of FIG. 11-7 (E), the 10R probability variation jackpot (SPECIAL MUMU BONUS) is notified as the type of jackpot.

FIG. 11-7 (F) shows a scene at the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, FIG. 11-7
In (F), "this time: 1530 points" indicates the number of balls acquired by the big hit this time, and "total: 3700 points" indicates the cumulative number of balls acquired by the big hit and the small hit.

FIG. 11-7 (G) shows a low probability / low base state (second KT state (MUMU RUSH)).
It shows the scene of notifying the transition to. The second KT state (MUMU RUSH)
Since the 10R probability variation jackpot was obtained according to the special figure 2, the second KT state (MUMU RUSH) is maintained (looped) as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 11-2).

FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode and the like of each scene in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-8 is another example that replaces FIG. 11-7, and FIG. 11-5 (A).
) → Fig. 11-5 (B), ..., Fig. 11-5 (G) → Fig. 11-5 (H) → Fig. 11-6 (A) →
11-6 (B), ..., 11-6 (G)-> 11-6 (H)-> 11-8 (A)-> 1
1-8 (B), ..., FIG. 11-8 (F) → FIG. 11-8 (G). Note that FIG. 11
The scene of −8 (A) is the same as the scene of FIG. 11-7 (A).

FIG. 11-8 (B) shows a scene in which the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol are variably displayed (big hit variation) corresponding to the hold display of the special figure 2 (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (H) is shown.

In FIG. 11-8 (C), as a display result, a stop display of the main decorative symbol and the second small decorative symbol (stop display of the jackpot symbol “222”) is performed (that is, in FIG. 11-4). (Scene corresponding to (i)) is shown.

FIG. 11-8 (D) shows a scene of waiting for the gate to pass. FIG. 11-8 (E) shows a scene in which the type of jackpot is notified. In the example of FIG. 11-8 (E), 2R normal jackpot (MINI MUMU BONUS) is notified as the type of jackpot.

FIG. 11-8 (F) shows a scene at the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, FIG. 11-8
In (F), "this time: 300 points" indicates the number of balls won in this big hit, and "total:
"2470 points" indicates the cumulative number of balls earned by big hits and small hits.

FIG. 11-8 (G) shows a scene in which the transition to the low probability / high base state (referred to as the challenge mode in the feature unit 014SH) is notified. The second KT state (MUMU)
During RUSH), since the 2R normal jackpot was obtained according to the special figure 2, the game state after the jackpot is completed is shifted to the low probability / high base state (see FIG. 11-2).

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of the flow of the game in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-9 shows a normal state to a jackpot game state (MUMU BONUS).
) -Second KT state (countdown effect) -The flow of the jackpot game state is shown.

In FIG. 11-9, the time changes from left to right, as in FIG. 11-4. In FIG. 11-9, the top row shows how to hit (left-handed, right-handed). The one below the way of hitting shows the game state and the like. The one below the game state and the like shows the state of fluctuation in Special Figure 1. The state of the change in the special figure 1 is shown below the state of the change in the special figure 2. The state of the change of the special figure 2 below shows the state of the operation of the special variable winning ball device 7. Below the state of operation of the special variable winning ball device 7, the state of operation of the special variable winning ball device 17 is shown.

11-10 to 11-12 are explanatory views for explaining the effect mode and the like of each scene in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12 relate to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 11-9, and FIGS. 11-10 (A) → 11-10 (B), ... ,
FIG. 11-10 (G) → FIG. 11-10 (H) → FIG. 11-11 (A) → FIG. 11-11 (B),
…, FIG. 11-11 (G) → FIG. 11-11 (H) → FIG. 11-12 (A) → FIG. 11-12 (B)
), ..., Fig. 11-12 (G) → Fig. 11-12 (H).

As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the normal state, the left-handed strike is performed and the variation of the special figure 1 is performed.
In the case of a big hit in Special Figure 1 (see (a) in FIG. 11-9), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 41 by right-handed hitting (see the gate passage waiting process in FIG. 10-25). (See), the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened (see (b) in FIG. 11-9). In other words, it will be in a big hit game state where it is digested by hitting right. During the jackpot game state, both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are reset (see step 044IW2502 in FIG. 10-25). The type of jackpot is assumed to be a 10R probability variation jackpot. Further, as shown in the figure, at the end of the big hit game state, it is assumed that there is a hold that becomes the big hit of the special figure 1. More specifically, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) in Special Figure 1 is 1 (one hold that becomes a jackpot), and the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2 (second hold). The number of memories) is assumed to be 4 (held during the jackpot game state).

FIG. 11-10 (A) is the hold display 014SH5A1 of the special figure 1 as in FIG. 11-5 (A).
It shows the scene just before (off) is digested.

FIG. 11-10 (B) shows the hold display 014SH5A1 of the special figure 1 as in FIG. 11-5 (B).
It shows a scene in which (off) is digested and variable display (disengagement variation) of the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol corresponding to the hold display 014SH5A1 of the special figure 1 is performed. Figure 11-1
0 (C) indicates a scene in which the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol are stopped (stopped and displayed as the out-of-order symbol "633") as the display result, as in FIG. 11-5 (C). ing.

FIG. 11-10 (D) is the hold display 014SH5A2 of the special figure 1 as in FIG. 11-5 (D).
It shows a scene in which (big hit) is digested and variable display (big hit variation) of the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol corresponding to the hold display 014SH5A2 of the special figure 1 is performed. Figure 11-1
In 0 (E), when the ball is in reach (or before it reaches reach), the game ball wins the first start winning opening of the winning ball device 6A, and the hold display 014SH5A3 (big hit) in Special Figure 1 is displayed. Shows the additionally displayed scene. That is, in the example of FIG. 11-5 (E), the hold display 014SH5A
3 (off) was additionally displayed, but in the example of FIG. 11-10 (E), the hold display 014SH5A
The difference is that 3 (big hit) is additionally displayed. As in FIG. 11-5 (F), FIG. 11-10 (F) shows the stop display of the main decorative symbol and the first small decorative symbol (big hit symbol "777") as a display result.
"Stop display) is being performed (that is, a scene corresponding to (a) in FIG. 11-9).

FIG. 11-10 (G) shows a scene of waiting for passage through the gate, as in FIG. 11-5 (G). FIG. 11-10 (H) shows a scene in which the type of jackpot is notified, as in FIG. 11-5 (H). In the example of FIG. 11-10 (H), as in the example of FIG. 11-5 (H), the 10R probability variation jackpot (SPECIAL MUMU BONUS) is notified as the type of jackpot. FIG. 11-11 (A) shows a scene during the jackpot game state (that is, a scene corresponding to (b) in FIG. 11-9) as in FIG. 11-6 (A). 11-11 (B) is shown in FIG.
Similar to -6 (B), the scene at the end of the jackpot game state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, after the jackpot game state is completed, the player is in the second KT state, which is digested by right-handed hitting. That is, since the 10R probability variation jackpot was obtained when the gaming state was the normal state, the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (FIG. 11-).
2). As described above, in the second KT state (during the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1), as the effect in the second KT state, a "countdown effect" is performed instead of "MUMU RUSH".

As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the second KT state, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is mainly performed, and when a small hit occurs (see (c) and (e) in FIG. 11-9), a special case occurs. The variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (see (d) and (f) in FIGS. 11-9). In other words, it will be in a small hit game state where it is digested by hitting right. Further, in the second KT state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is mainly performed, but as described above, at the end of the big hit game state, in addition to the hold of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is also held, so that the special figure 1 is held. Fluctuations are also made. Specifically, since there is one hold that is a big hit as the hold of the special figure 1, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 due to the hold is a big hit (see (g) in FIG. 11-9). As shown in the figure, the period during which the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (0.8 seconds or 1).
.. 8 seconds. In FIGS. 10-6 (B), 10-13, and 10-14), the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped (see FIG. 10-19), so that the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state. As a result, the time for displaying the fluctuation start to stop of the special figure 1 becomes longer by the period of time. In particular,
The time from the start to the stop display of the jackpot fluctuation in the special figure 1 is longer than the 90 seconds (shown) of the first fluctuation pattern # 09 in FIG. 11-1 (B).

FIG. 11-11 (C) shows a low probability / low base state (second KT state (countdown effect)).
) Is shown. The countdown effect is an effect of updating (basically reducing) the number of countdowns according to the remaining fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 by the first small decoration symbol. The countdown number may be a number corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 1, and may accurately indicate the remaining fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation (for example, accurately in seconds). , It may roughly suggest the remaining fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation.

Also, during the countdown production, if you hit right, you will frequently get a small hit (Fig. 11-9 (Fig. 11-9).
c) (Refer to (e)), because the special variable winning ball device 17 is frequently opened (Fig. 11-9 (Fig. 11-9).
d) (See (f)), it is necessary to hit right (if you do not hit right, the player will lose). However, since the player may stop right-handed during the countdown effect (for example, there is a risk of refraining from launching the game ball just by looking at the countdown number), as shown in FIG. As shown above, in addition to the right-handed notification, the message "Please right-handed until the countdown reaches 0" is displayed (notification, warning).

11-11 (D) shows the variable display (big hit variation) of the first small decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 (holding amount at the end of the non-display big hit game state), and the holding of the special figure 2. It shows a scene in which a variable display (small hit variation) of the second small decorative symbol corresponding to the display (non-display) is performed. The numerical value "89" in the center is the number of countdowns updated by the countdown effect.
In addition, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 by the first small decoration symbol is 90 seconds ((Fig. 11-1 (B).
) Is the first fluctuation pattern # 09), so it is a long fluctuation in the figure. However, the actual fluctuation start-stop display time is longer than the fluctuation time (90 seconds).

As a display result, FIG. 11-11 (E) shows a stop display of the second small decorative symbol (small hit symbol “1).
A scene in which the stop display of "35") is performed (that is, a scene corresponding to (c) in FIG. 11-9) is shown. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (E), the central numerical value (countdown number) is updated to "88". Further, the first small decoration symbol remains in the variable display.
In FIG. 11-11 (F), the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state ((d) in FIG. 11-9.
), The scene where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 is shown. Note that FIG. 11
In -11 (F), the central "+10 points" informs the number of balls acquired by the above-mentioned winning (for example, one winning). As shown in FIG. 11-11 (F), the first small decorative symbol remains in the variable display.

FIG. 11-11 (G) shows a scene in which the variable display (small hit variation) of the second small decorative symbol corresponding to the next hold display (non-display) of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (G), the first small decorative symbol is also in the variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (G), the number of acquired balls has been updated to "1570 points".

FIG. 11-11 (H) shows a scene in which the countdown number is updated to “87”.
As shown in FIG. 11-11 (H), both the first small decoration symbol and the second small decoration symbol are still being variably displayed.

As a display result, FIG. 11-12 (A) shows a stop display of the second small decorative symbol (small hit symbol "1".
A scene in which the stop display of "35") is performed (that is, a scene corresponding to (e) in FIG. 11-9) is shown. As shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), the countdown number is "86".
Has been updated to. Further, the first small decoration symbol remains in the variable display. Figure 11-12 (
B) shows a scene in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (see (f) in FIG. 11-9) and the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17. In addition, in FIG. 11-12 (B), "+20 points" in the center informs the number of balls acquired by the above-mentioned winning (for example, two winnings). As shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), the first small decorative symbol remains in the variable display.

FIG. 11-12 (C) shows a scene in which the variable display (small hit variation) of the second small decorative symbol corresponding to the next hold display (non-display) of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), the first small decorative symbol is also in the variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), the number of acquired balls has been updated to "1590 points".

In the second KT state, there is a high probability that Special Figure 2 will win a small hit (specifically, Figure 10-4 (B).
) 62896/65536), because the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a small hit is also short (specifically,
Similar to the second variation pattern # 32 (1.5 seconds, or the second variation pattern # 33 (5 seconds)) and the second KT state (MUMU RUSH) shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), the second KT state ( In the countdown effect), right-handed hits frequently result in small hits ((c) (e) in FIGS. 11-9.
), FIG. 11-11 (E), FIG. 11-12 (A)), the game ball can be won by the special variable winning ball device 17 in the open state ((d) in FIG. 11-9). (F), FIG. 11-1
1 (F), see FIG. 11-12 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 (g in FIG. 11-9).
), The special variable winning ball device 7 is opened based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 41 by hitting right (see the gate passage waiting process in FIG. 10-25). That is, it becomes a big hit game state. It should be noted that the special figure 2 which is changing due to the stop of the big hit symbol of the special figure 1 is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped (the second special symbol symbol change processing of FIG. 10-22, (h) in FIG. 11-9). reference).

FIG. 11-12 (D) shows a scene in which a variable display (small hit variation, etc.) of the second small decorative symbol corresponding to the hold display (non-display) of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 11-12 (D), the countdown number has been updated to "02". Further, the first small decoration symbol remains in the variable display. FIG. 11-12 (E) shows a scene in which the countdown number is updated to “01”. The first small decoration symbol and the second small decoration symbol are still being displayed in a variable manner.

In FIG. 11-12 (F), the countdown number is updated to "00", and as a display result, the stop display of the first small decoration symbol (stop display of the jackpot symbol "555") is performed (that is, the stop display of the jackpot symbol "555"). The scene corresponding to (g) in FIG. 11-9) and the scene where the stop display of the second small decorative symbol (the stop display of the forcibly removed symbol "864") is performed (that is, FIG. 11-). (H in 9)
) Is shown.

FIG. 11-12 (G) shows a scene of waiting for the gate to pass. FIG. 11-12 (H) shows
It shows a scene where the type of jackpot is notified. In the example of FIG. 11-12 (H), 6R probability variation jackpot (BIG MUMU BONUS) is notified as the type of jackpot.

FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode and the like of each scene in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-13 (A) is another example that replaces FIG. 11-11 (F). Further, FIGS. 11-13 (B) to 11-13 (H) are shown in FIGS. 11-11 (E) to 11-.
This is another example that replaces 12 (F) and the like.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12, the countdown number is not set during the small hit game state (the period during which the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state) in the second KT state (countdown effect). Although it is displayed (FIG. 11-11 (F)), FIG. 11-12 (FIG. 11-12).
As shown in B), the countdown number is hidden), and the second KT state (
The countdown number may be displayed during the small hit game state in the countdown effect).

In the case where the countdown number is displayed during the small hit game state in the second KT state (countdown effect), the countdown number displayed during the small hit game state may not be updated. That is, during the small hit game state in the second KT state (countdown effect), the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped as described above (
Although (see FIG. 10-19), in the mode in which the countdown number is not displayed during the small hit game state in the second KT state (countdown effect), the countdown number is not updated before and after the small hit game state (for example, FIG. 11-). 11 (E) to 11-11 (G), FIG. 11-12 (A)
)-See FIG. 11-12 (C)), even when the countdown number is displayed during the small hit game state in the second KT state (countdown effect), the countdown displayed during the small hit game state is similarly displayed. You may not update the number.

Further, when the countdown number displayed during the small hit game state is not updated, the player may be notified that the countdown number is not updated. Specifically, for example, instead of the display as shown in FIG. 11-11 (F), the display as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) may be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the player is notified that the countdown number is not updated by the wording "HOLD !!", the key, and the countdown number bound and fixed by the chain. There is.

Further, the period during which the countdown number is not updated, that is, the period during which the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state (0.8 seconds for the small hit B, 1.8 seconds for the small hit C. FIGS. 10-13, FIG. 10
-14), the notification mode may be different. Specifically, the period during which the countdown number is not updated may be notified. For example, one or more of "HOLD !!", a key, and a chain is displayed in a notification color (black, silver, etc.) that notifies a short period in the case of a small hit B, and in the case of a small hit C. May be displayed in a notification color (red, gold) that notifies a long period of time. Further, instead of or in addition to the notification by the above notification color, in the case of small hit B, "short is open!" Is displayed, and in the case of small hit C, "long open!" Is displayed. Good.

It may also suggest a period during which the countdown number is not updated. For example, in the case of small hit B and small hit C, "Long open?" May be displayed, and small hit B
The ratio of "Long open?" May be displayed differently between the small hit C and the small hit C. As an example,
The display ratio of "Short opening!", "Long opening?" And "Long opening!" Is displayed in the case of small hit B: {"Short opening!": "Long opening?": "Long opening?" Medium! "= 90
: 10: 0}, and in the case of small hit C, {"Short opening!": "Long opening?":
“Long opening!” = 0:30:70} may be set. Also, before the period when the countdown number is not updated (that is, during the small hit fluctuation), "Long open?" May be displayed, and the small hit B and the small hit C are displayed as "Long open?" The displayed ratio may be different. As an example, the ratio of whether or not "long open?" Is displayed during the small hit fluctuation is set to {None: Yes = 90:10} when the small hit is B, and the small hit is C. If the hit is fluctuating, {None: Yes = 10:90} may be set. In addition, it may be suggested during the fluctuation whether the countdown number will not be updated. As an example, the ratio of whether or not "Open?" Is displayed during fluctuation is set to {None: Yes = 90:10} in the case of out-of-change fluctuation, resulting in a small hit (small hit B, small hit C). If it is fluctuating, it may be {None: Yes = 10: 90}.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-11, 11-12, and 11-13 (A), the countdown number is not updated during the small hit game state in the second KT state (countdown effect), but the second KT Even in the small hit game state in the state (countdown effect)
The countdown number may be updated. Specifically, for example, FIG. 11-11 (E).
) To FIG. 11-12 (F), instead of the display shown in FIGS. 11-13 (B) to 11-13 (H).
) May be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-11 (E) to 11-12 (F), before and after the small hit game state (FIG. 11-11 (F)) (FIGS. 11-11 (E), FIG. 11).
Although the countdown number has not been updated at -11 (G) (both are "88"), Fig. 1
In the example shown in 1-13 (B) to 11-13 (H), the small hit game state (FIG. 11-13 (C)
)), The countdown number is updated before and after (FIGS. 11-13 (B) and 11-13 (D)) (“88” → “86”).

Further, during the small hit game state in the second KT state (countdown effect), the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped as described above (see FIG. 10-19), so that the second KT
In the case where the countdown number is not updated during the small hit game state in the state (countdown effect), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (G), after the countdown number becomes "0", the first step is made. For the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time timer was stopped (that is, the remaining special figure 1)
The number (“39” in FIG. 11-13 (G)) corresponding to the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is added. For example, until the countdown number becomes "0", the period during which the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped is timed (accumulated), and after the countdown number becomes "0", the first fluctuation time timer A number corresponding to the period during which the subtraction of is stopped (that is, the accumulated number of seconds) may be added. Although the illustrations after FIG. 11-13 are omitted, similarly, after the countdown number becomes "0", the time corresponding to the period during which the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped is added. do it.

Although the countdown number is "0" in both the scene of FIG. 11-13 (F) and the scene of FIG. 11-12 (F), the actual elapsed time after the transition to the second KT state (countdown effect) Because they are different (because the actual elapsed time is longer in the scene shown in Fig. 11-13 (F) than in the scene shown in Fig. 11-12 (F)), the examples of the number of points earned are different for each (Fig. 11-12 (F)). 11-1
In the scene of 2 (F), the number of points earned is "1960", and in the scene of FIG. 11-13 (F), the number of points earned is "1810 points").

Further, the number corresponding to the period during which the subtraction of the first variable time timer is stopped may be suggested before the actual addition. For example, when adding (Fig. 11-1)
(The beginning of the scene of 3 (G), etc.) and immediately before the addition (Fig. 11-13 (E) and Fig. 11-13 (F)
), Etc.) may suggest the number to be added. As an example, when the number of additions of the display "Large amount of addition !?", the display "Addition !?", and the ratio of no display is equal to or more than the first judgment value (for example, "40"), {""Add a large amount !?": "Add !?": No display = 40, 30, 30}, and the number to be added is equal to or greater than the second judgment value (for example, "10") and the first judgment value (for example, "40"). If it is less than ", etc.), {"Add a large amount !? ":" Add !? ": No display = 10, 40, 50}, and the number to be added is the second judgment value (for example," 10 "). If it is less than {"Add a large amount !?": "Add !?": No display = 0
, 20, 80}.

The feature unit 014SH has been described above with reference to FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 and the like.
As explained at the beginning, the feature unit 014SH is configured to perform the small hit determination, although the big hit determination is not performed on the second special symbol when the first special symbol is undergoing the big hit fluctuation. In addition, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the second KT state is 90 seconds (FIG. 11-1 (B).
) Shown in the first fluctuation pattern # 09). Therefore, when the special figure 1 wins the big hit in the second KT state, at least 90 seconds from the time when the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts (that is, the 90 seconds does not include the time in the small hit gaming state). Therefore, the second KT state is maintained (because the big hit of special figure 2 is not judged during the big hit fluctuation of special figure 1), and the small hit is acquired in special figure 2. can do. For this reason,
When special figure 1 wins a big hit immediately after the transition to the second KT state (for example, FIG. 11-9)
Even in the case of holding a series as shown in (1), a small hit can be obtained in the special figure 2 for at least 90 seconds.

Although the description is omitted in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, the pre-reading advance notice effect may also be executed in the feature unit 014SH. Specifically, the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold memory corresponding to the main fluctuation may be executed. For example, in the left-handed normal state, since the main fluctuation is the special figure 1, the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold memory of the special figure 1 (for example, the hold change effect in the first hold display area 5A, the cut-in effect, Execute dialogue production, etc.), and in the right-handed KT state,
Since the main variation is the special figure 2, even if the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold memory of the special figure 2 (for example, the hold change effect in the second hold display area 5B, the cut-in effect, the dialogue effect, etc.) is executed. Good.

Further, even in the mode of executing the look-ahead advance notice effect corresponding to the hold memory corresponding to the main change, there is a hold memory corresponding to the change that is not the main change until the end of the change that is not the main change. During the period (including the period during which the fluctuation is not the main fluctuation and the period during which the fluctuation that is not the main fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the execution of the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold memory corresponding to the main fluctuation may be restricted. For example, the second KT
In the state (MUMU RUSH), the main fluctuation is before the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the fluctuation that is not the main fluctuation is completed (for example, in the scenes of FIGS. 11-6 (D) to 11-6 (G)). Special figure 2
The execution of the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold memory of is restricted, and it is a fluctuation that is not the main fluctuation.
After the fluctuation of FIG. 11 is completed (for example, in the scenes shown in FIGS. 11-6 (H) and below), the look-ahead advance notice effect corresponding to the reserved storage of the special figure 2 which is the main fluctuation may be executed.

The look-ahead notice effect is not limited to the one that announces the jackpot reliability (whether it will be a jackpot), and may be the one that announces a specific jackpot reliability (whether it will be a jackpot with a high advantage). In the feature unit 014SH, as described above, in the case of a big hit, the production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is decided (the production mode in which the ally character wins the battle or the production mode in which the ally character loses the battle) is set as the big hit. If this is not the case, a production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is not determined (a production mode in which the battle is a draw, a production mode in which one character escapes, a production mode in which one character fades out in the middle of the production, etc.) is used, which is highly advantageous for the player. In the case of a big hit (for example, a 10R probability variation big hit), a production mode in which a ally character wins the battle (see FIG. 11-7 (C)) is used as a production mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is determined, which is highly advantageous for the player. When there is no big hit (for example, 2R normal big hit), the effect mode in which the victory or defeat of the battle is decided is the effect mode in which the ally character loses the battle (see FIG. 11-8 (C)). That is, in the second KT state (MUMU RUSH), at least the 2R normal big hit that loses the battle is less desirable for the player than the small hit or the like (small hit, miss) that draws to the battle. In addition, after the big hit game state, the second KT state (MUMU RUSH)
) (The second KT state (MUMU RUSH) loops), at least the 10R probability variation big hit seems to be more desirable for the player than the small hits and the like (small hits, misses) that draw in the battle. In consideration of these, for example, a notice (suggestion) of a 10R probability variation jackpot, etc.
Perform a hold change effect (a display mode reminiscent of good luck, for example, a change to a heart pattern) with a positive hue (remembering a chance) that suggests a battle victory.
2R Normal jackpot etc. is foretold (suggested) and a negative color (remembering a pinch) holding change production (display mode reminiscent of bad luck. For example, change to a skull pattern) that suggests battle defeat. It is executed and suggests that a pending change effect (for example, a change to a sword pattern, a heart pattern or a skull pattern) will be made to suggest (suggest) the start of a battle as a warning (suggestion) of one of the jackpots. (Change to symbol) may be executed.

Needless to say, in the feature unit 014SH, the big hit fluctuation in the special figure 1 is not forcibly missed even if the small hit symbol in the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed.
The example (variation example) of 50 (A) and FIG. 10-55 (B) does not apply.

Although the feature unit 014 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 11 to 11-13 and the like, the specific configuration is not limited to the range specifically described and does not deviate from the purpose of the feature unit 014. Therefore, various modifications and applications are possible.

For example, in the second KT state (countdown effect), the main decoration pattern is not displayed.
Although the small decoration design is displayed (Fig. 11-3, Fig. 11-11 to Fig. 11-13), neither the main decoration design nor the small decoration design may be displayed in the second KT state (countdown effect). .. In addition, a small decorative symbol corresponding to the main variable special symbol (specifically, a second small decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol 014SHKKZ2) is displayed, and the other small decorative symbol (specifically, the first small decorative symbol) is displayed. The first small decorative symbol 014SHKKZ1) and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol may not be displayed.

For example, in the second KT state (countdown effect), the number of balls acquired by each small hit is displayed (see FIGS. 11-11 (F) and 11-12 (B)), but in addition to the above, the number is small. The cumulative number of balls won by winning may be displayed. For example, in a scene such as FIG. 11-11 (G), the cumulative number of balls acquired by a big hit "1560 points" and the cumulative number of balls acquired by a small hit "10 points" are displayed side by side, and FIG. In scenes such as, the cumulative number of balls earned by big hits "1560 points" and the cumulative number of balls earned by small hits "30 points" are displayed side by side, and in scenes such as Fig. 11-12 (D), the cumulative number of balls earned by jackpots is earned. Number of balls "156"
You may display "0 points" and "400 points", which is the total number of balls earned by small hits, side by side.

In addition, in the scene where the second KT state (countdown effect) is entered, in addition to the right-handed notification, "Please right-handed until the countdown reaches 0" is displayed (notification, warning).
However, it may be displayed in an overlapping manner in other scenes (FIG. 11-11 (C)). For example, all scenes of the second KT state (countdown effect) (FIGS. 11-11 (C) to 11-12 (FIGS. 11-12)
In F), "Please hit right until the countdown reaches 0" may be displayed in layers. In addition, for all scenes in the 2nd KT state (countdown effect), if necessary (
For example, when the passage of the game ball to the gate 41 is not detected continuously for a predetermined time and the second reserved memory number becomes 0), "Please hit right until the countdown becomes 0. May be superimposed and displayed.

Further, a mode in which the countdown number is added after the countdown number becomes 0 in the second KT state (countdown effect) has been described (see FIG. 11-13 (G)).
The execution timing of the addition is not limited after the countdown number becomes 0. For example
The timing of the final stage of the countdown effect (for example, the number of countdowns is 10 or less (1)
The addition may be executed at the timing after becoming 0 to 0). At which timing at the end of the countdown effect the addition may be executed may be determined by lottery or may be determined in advance. The addition may be executed at a timing other than the final stage of the countdown effect.

There are multiple types of operation modes (background, etc.) in the normal state (multiple operation modes related to jackpot reliability, etc. (for example, operation modes executed as pre-reading notice effects), or multiple operation modes not related to jackpot reliability, etc.). (For example, an operation mode in which the player can freely switch with a button or the like) is provided, the countdown effect is executed regardless of the type of operation mode in the normal state. There may be. For example, there may be only one type of effect of the countdown effect (that is, in the operation mode A, even if the 10R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the special figure 1 and the jackpot is held in the special figure 1), the operation is performed. In mode B, even if the 10R probability variation jackpot is obtained in Special Figure 1 and the jackpot is held in a row in Special Figure 1, since there is only one type of production mode for the countdown effect, as a result, the countdown of the same production mode is performed. The production may be performed). Alternatively, the countdown effect is executed by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes, but the 10R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the operation mode A and the jackpot is held, or 1 in the operation mode B.
One of the production modes may be determined regardless of whether the 0R probability variation jackpot is obtained and the jackpot is held.

On the other hand, although different from the above, the countdown effect may be executed according to the type of operation mode in the normal state.

Further, in the above, when the special figure 1 becomes a 10R probable big hit and the special figure 1 which has already won a prize at the end of the big hit gaming state of the 10R probable big hit becomes a big hit (the big hit in the special figure 1). The second KT after the end of the jackpot game state of the 10R probability variation jackpot
Although the example of executing the countdown effect in the state has been described, whether or not the countdown effect is executed may be different depending on the type of the jackpot of the special figure 1 which is held in succession. For example, in order to raise the expectation that the countdown effect will be performed (or not to reduce the impression that the countdown effect will be performed), the jackpot of the special figure 1 that is held in a row has a high advantage (for example, the jackpot). If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, etc.), the countdown effect may be executed, and if it is a jackpot that is not highly advantageous (for example, a 6R normal jackpot, etc.), the countdown effect may not be executed. Further, for example, when the big hit of the special figure 1 which emphasizes the balance and is held in a row is a big hit with a low advantage (for example, a 6R normal big hit), a countdown effect is executed and a big hit with a high advantage (for example). If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, etc.), the countdown effect may not be executed. When executing the countdown effect (that is, when it is a big hit of the type for executing the countdown effect), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 90 seconds (the first fluctuation pattern # 09 of FIG. 11-1 (B)). 90 seconds), and when the countdown effect is not executed (that is, when the jackpot is of a type that does not execute the countdown effect), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 10 seconds (the first fluctuation pattern of FIG. 10-7 (B)). #
It may be (10 seconds of 09).

Further, in the above, an example of executing the countdown effect during the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the second KT state has been described, but the first KT state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first).
The countdown effect may be executed during the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the KT state). That is, the countdown effect may be executed during the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of FIG. 1 in the KT (first KT state and second KT state). Alternatively, the countdown effect may be executed during the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the second KT state, and the countdown effect may not be executed during the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the first KT state. Since small hits do not occur frequently in the 1st KT state (see Fig. 10-9 (G) (H)), right-handed display 014SH007 and "Please right-handed until the count reaches 0" are displayed. You may not do it. For example, it may be displayed as "preparing for a big hit".

Further, in the above, when the 10R probability variation jackpot is obtained in Special Figure 1 and the jackpot is held in a row in Special Figure 1, a countdown effect for updating the countdown number in the second KT state after the end of the jackpot game state is executed. Although an example has been described, the effect to be executed in the second KT state after the end of the big hit game state in the case where the 10R probability variation big hit is obtained in Special Figure 1 and the big hit is held in a row in Special Figure 1 is not limited to the countdown effect. For example, a meter effect that updates the value of the meter may be executed. Further, the effect to be executed may be one according to the type of the jackpot of the special figure 1 which is held in a row. For example, depending on whether the countdown effect is executed or the meter effect is executed, it may be notified or suggested which type of jackpot will be obtained after the end of the effect (that is, after the stop display of the long fluctuation).

Further, in the above, the example in which the countdown effect is executed in the second KT state after the end of the big hit game state when the 10R probability variation big hit is obtained in Special Figure 1 and the big hit is held in a row in Special Figure 1 has been described. When the special figure 1 that has already won at the end of the game state does not become a big hit, but the special figure 1 that wins after shifting to the second KT state becomes a big hit (that is, special figure 1)
If it is not a pending ream. In the 2nd KT state, the special figure 2 by hitting right is the main variable special figure, but the game ball happens to flow to the left side of the game area, and the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening) is won. , And in the case of a big hit), a countdown effect or the like (a countdown effect or another effect such as a meter effect instead of the countdown effect) may be executed.

On the other hand, unlike the above, when the big hit of special figure 1 is held, a countdown effect etc. is executed, while when the special figure 1 which won a prize after shifting to the second KT state becomes a big hit, a countdown effect etc. is executed. You may not execute it. When the countdown effect is executed (that is, when it is a big hit of the special figure 1 which is a hold sequence), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 90 seconds (the first fluctuation pattern # 09 of FIG. 11-1 (B)). 90 seconds), and when the countdown effect is not executed, the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is 10 seconds (the first fluctuation pattern # of FIG. 10-7 (B)).
It may be (10 seconds of 09).

The probability variation jackpot of the feature unit 014SH is a so-called one-time loop (probability variation until the next jackpot), but a so-called probability variation limiter may be provided. In addition, a fall lottery for falling with a low probability may be provided. In addition, when a fall lottery that falls with a low probability is provided, there is a case where the second KT state shifts (falls) to the normal state, but for example, a special effect may suggest a shift to the normal state. .. For example, when a fall is determined, an effect of changing the countdown value from the normal mode (lighting) to the suggestion mode (blinking) is executed, and then the cantdown value is erased to shift to the normal state, while , Even if the fall is not determined, sometimes the effect of changing the countdown value from the normal mode (lighting) to the suggestion mode (blinking) may be executed).

Further, the probability variation jackpot of the feature unit 014SH is a so-called one-time loop (probability variation until the next jackpot), but it may be a so-called ST (number-cut probability variation). In the case of ST, if the game state shifts during the execution of the special effect, the player is confused (specifically, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the number of STs is exhausted during the execution of the special effect, and the second KT state is completed. If you fall from the normal state to the normal state, it may cause confusion for the player because it suddenly becomes difficult to make a small hit, etc.), so ST during the execution of the special effect so that the game state does not shift during the execution of the special effect. The time during which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 does not end after the number of times may be set as the execution time of the special effect (that is, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1). Specifically, from the fluctuation time of special figure 2 and the control time of the small hit game state, special figure 2
The execution time of the special effect may be a short time that does not exceed the expected time required to fluctuate by the number of STs.

On the other hand, unlike the above, the execution time of the special effect may be a time during which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of STs is completely digested during the execution of the special effect. That is, a long time exceeding the above-mentioned expected time may be set as the execution time of the special effect. If the execution time of the special effect is the time during which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the number of STs is completely consumed during the execution of the special effect, the game state is changed when the game state shifts during the execution of the special effect. Notify the player that the transition has occurred (specifically, that the player has fallen from the second KT state to the normal state) (for example, notification by ending the special effect at the transition of the gaming state, or even after the transition of the gaming state. When the special effect is continuously executed, the effect mode of the special effect may be changed to a different effect mode from that before the transition (notification, etc.). It should be noted that, before the game state actually shifts (a little before the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the number of STs is completely digested, for example, before the number fluctuation), the fact that the game state shifts may be notified as a notice.

As a game machine of the feature unit 014SH, the special figure 1 is the main fluctuation in the normal state, and the special figure 2 is the main fluctuation in the KT state, and the second KT state (the second KT state (MUMU)).
RUSH), in the second KT state (countdown effect)), we explained the configuration in which the number of balls is gradually increased due to the small hits that occur frequently in Special Figure 2, but the feature part 014SH
The configuration of the game machine is not limited to this. For example, in the normal state, special figure 2 is the main fluctuation by changing the arrangement position and hitting method of the winning ball device and the variable winning ball device in the game area, various probabilities, the fluctuation time, etc., and in the KT state. 1 is the main fluctuation in the special figure 1, and the ball output may be gradually increased due to the small hits that frequently occur in the special figure 1 in the second KT state.

As described above, the gaming machine of the feature unit 014SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example). For example, step S25 in the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.
It is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where A and S25B are executed). Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed in the CPU 103) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) as the display result of the variable display are derived and displayed, which is different from the advantageous state. A special state control means that can control a state (for example, a small hit game state) (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
The special state control means (for example, the second KT state) that can be controlled to the special state (for example, the second KT state) in which the game value is likely to be given by the special state as the game state in which the variable display is executed. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (
Specifically, the CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 011SHS2208), and is decorated in accordance with either the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Identification information (for example, main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ in FIG. 11-3 (A))
1 and the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2 in FIG. 11-3 (B) are executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ corresponds to the first special symbol.
It is possible to execute the variable display of 1 and execute the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2 corresponding to the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B)), and the first identification information and the first identification information and the first 2 Of the identification information, the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information (for example, in the case of left-handed, the second special symbol (in the case of left-handed, FIGS. 11-5 (A) to 11-5 (Fig. 11-5 (A)) As shown in F), the variable display of the main decorative symbol 014SHSKZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol is performed.
Of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the second special symbol does not correspond to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1). Further, in the case of right-handed, the first special symbol (in the case of right-handed, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (D) to 11-7 (C), the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol Since the variable display of 014SHSKZ2 is performed, the specific display result is the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which does not correspond to the variable display of the main decorative symbol 014SHSKZ2. Derived display (for example, in the case of right-handed, FIG. 1
As shown in 1-12 (F), the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the first special symbol. In FIG. 11-12 (F), the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the first special symbol, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the first small decorative symbol 014SHKKZ1 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-12 (E)), the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is executed. In FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-12 (E), the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed indicates that the first small decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is executed. (Indicated by the fact that the variable display of 014SHKKZ1 is executed), the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is started (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in 11 (D), the variable display of the second special symbol is started. In FIG. 11-11 (D), the variable display of the second special symbol is started, which is the second corresponding to the second special symbol. When the variable display of the small decorative symbol 014SHKKZ2 is started), the display result of the variable display to be started (for example, the display result of the second special symbol) is not set as the specific display result. On the other hand, it is possible to determine the result of the special display (in the feature unit 014SH, when the first special symbol is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation, the second special symbol is not determined to be a jackpot, but is small. Since the hit determination is configured to be performed, it is possible to determine that the second special symbol is not a big hit symbol, while it is possible to determine that it is a small hit symbol), the special state (for example, the first). In the 2KT state), the variable display of the identification information (variable display of the identification information) that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information (2KT state)
For example, in response to the big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, FIG. 11).
Execute the countdown effect shown in -11 to 11-13 (for example, 11-9, FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-12 (F), it is possible to execute the countdown effect during the variable display period of the first special symbol, which is a big hit).

This will improve the interest. For example, in the special state, when the variable display of the identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information and the variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result is performed. Even so, during the variable display, a special effect can be executed, and the variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information can be used as the special display result. The interest is improved.

The special effect is the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information in the special state is derived and displayed (for example, the second KT state). 11-11 (D) to 11-12 of FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-12, which suggest an aspect (for example, the timing at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol).
(F), the effect of updating the countdown number as shown in FIGS. 11-13) may be performed.

As a result, the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is derived and displayed is recognized (or generally recognized).
can do.

The special effect is the given game value (for example, FIG. 11-3 (C) and FIG. 11-11 (D).
)-As shown in FIGS. 11-12 (F) and 11-13, the number of acquired balls obtained by the big hit and the small hit. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (F), 11-12 (B), 11-13 (A), and 11-13 (C), the number of acquired balls acquired by each small hit) is notified. It may be an effect performed according to the mode to be performed.

As a result, the given game value can be recognized during the special production.

The advantageous state includes three types (for example, three types corresponding to the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), and a second special symbol as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). There are four types), and when the special effect is being executed, the first identification information and the second
In the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the identification information (for example, in the variable display of the first special symbol when the countdown effect is executed).
The effect corresponding to the type of advantageous state may not be executed. For example, during the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (F), the 6R probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol (FIG. 1).
The jackpot symbol "555" corresponding to 1-12 (H)) is the first small decoration symbol 014SHK.
Although it is displayed as KZ1, it may not be displayed as the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1. That is, when the special effect is being executed, the effect corresponding to the type of advantageous state (the jackpot type of the special figure 1) (the effect of aligning the symbols by the main decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot type of the special figure 1) is not executed. You may do so.

This makes it possible to draw attention to special effects (countdown number, etc.). Or
It is possible to avoid causing unnecessary confusion.

Further, for example, the special effect may not be an effect executed in a different effect mode depending on the type of jackpot in the special figure 1. That is, when the special effect is being executed, the effect corresponding to the type of advantageous state (big hit type in Special Figure 1) (the effect mode corresponding to the big hit type in Special Figure 1).
The effect of the background color and the display mode of the countdown number) may not be executed. As an example, there may be one type of effect mode of the countdown effect (that is, since there is only one type of effect mode, as a result, the countdown of the same effect mode is always the same regardless of the type of jackpot of the first special symbol. The production may be performed). Alternatively, although the countdown effect is executed by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes, one of the effect modes may be determined regardless of the jackpot type shown in FIG.

Thereby, the interest (for example, the interest of which kind of jackpot will be) can be maintained until the special effect is completed (that is, until the jackpot symbol by the first special symbol is stopped).

Although it is different from the above, when the special effect is being executed, the type of advantageous state (Special Figure 1).
The effect corresponding to the big hit type of the above (the effect according to the effect mode (background color, countdown number display mode) corresponding to the big hit type in Special Figure 1) may be executed, and the type of the advantageous state is suggested. You may try to perform the production.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest when the special production is started.

A first holding storage means for storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information and information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as a hold storage (for example, storing information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol as a hold storage). A hold storage buffer, a second hold storage buffer that stores information related to variable display of a second special symbol as hold storage, and a hold display means that can display the hold display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, a first hold storage). The first hold display area 5A capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the buffer and the second hold display area 5B) capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage buffer are provided, and the special effect is executed. Corresponding to, decoration identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C), main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1, main decoration symbol 014SHS
KZ2) and the hold display (eg, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage buffer, second
The hold display corresponding to the hold storage buffer) may not be displayed.

This makes it possible to draw attention to special effects (countdown number, etc.). Or
It is possible to avoid causing unnecessary confusion.

Hold storage means (for example, information regarding variable display of the first special symbol) that stores information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as the first hold storage and stores information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as the second hold storage (for example, information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol) The first hold storage buffer that stores the information as the first hold storage, the second hold storage buffer that stores the information related to the variable display of the second special symbol as the second hold storage), and
A hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to one of the first hold storage and the second hold storage (for example, a hold display capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage buffer). The hold display area 5A and the second hold display area 5B) capable of displaying the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage buffer are provided, and the hold display means includes the first hold storage and the second hold storage. Of the above, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information is not displayed, while the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is supported. The hold display can be displayed (for example, in the case of left-handed, FIG. 1
As shown in 1-3 (A), the second that does not correspond to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ1.
While the hold display of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold memory is not displayed, the main decoration symbol 014SHS
It is possible to display the hold display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold memory corresponding to the variable display of KZ1, and in the case of right-handed, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), the main decorative symbol 014SHSK.
The hold display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold memory that does not correspond to the variable display of Z2 is not displayed, while the hold display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2. When the special effect is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information among the first hold memory and the second hold memory is not displayed. In addition, neither the decoration identification information nor the hold display corresponding to the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information among the first hold storage and the second hold storage is displayed (for example, a right-handed countdown effect). When is running, Figure 1
As shown in 1-3 (C), the first that does not correspond to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2.
In addition to not displaying the hold display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold memory, the main decoration symbol 01
The 4SHSKZ2 may also not display the hold display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the main decoration symbol 014SHSKZ2).

This makes it possible to draw attention to special effects (countdown number, etc.). Or
It is possible to avoid causing unnecessary confusion.

The execution time of the special effect becomes longer according to the period controlled to the special state during the execution of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the period controlled to the small hit gaming state). Since the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer is stopped, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (that is, the execution time of the countdown effect) becomes longer according to the period controlled in the small hit game state). It may be a controlled production.

As a result, the interest can be improved.

The special effect stops a part of the special effect each time it is controlled to the special state during the execution of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the update of the countdown number is stopped). It may be a production.

This makes it possible to recognize that the state is controlled to a special state.

The special effect notifies a period controlled to the special state (for example, the total time controlled to each small hit game state) during the execution of the special effect (for example, FIG. 11-13 (G).
) Is included, and the notification effect is executed at the end of the special effect (for example, after the countdown number becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 11-13 (G)). It may be what is done.

As a result, the interest (for example, the interest of how long the period controlled by the special state is, the interest of how many countdowns are added) can be maintained until the end of the special production.

(Relationship between each feature)
The elements constituting the embodiment of the feature unit 044IW and the elements constituting the embodiment of the feature unit 014SH may be appropriately combined.

For example, the setting value suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-39) may be executed in the feature unit 014SH. As an example, a set value suggestion effect may be executed in a special effect (countdown effect, etc.). Specifically, when the special figure 2 is out of the special effect, the set value suggestion effect setting process (step 044IWS925 in FIG. 10-38) may be executed. Also,
The set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed in relation to the countdown number in the special effect. For example, the countdown number is doublet (for example, FIGS. 11-11 (D) to 11-12 (F).
), The set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed when it is “88”, “77”, ..., “11”), or the countdown number is doublet in the special effect. , When the special figure 2 is out of order, the set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed.

Further, instead of or in addition to the above, the set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed in relation to the small hit game state during the special effect. For example, the set value suggestion effect setting process is executed on the condition that the number of winning balls to the special variable winning ball device 17 in one small hit game state during the special effect becomes a predetermined number of balls (for example, two) or more. It may be possible, provided that the cumulative number of winning balls to the special variable winning ball device 17 in each small hit game state during one special production is a predetermined number (for example, 70) or more. The setting value suggestion effect setting process may be executed, and it is a condition that the number of times (the number of small hits) in the small hit game state during one special effect is a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) or more. The set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed. Further, in the mode of performing the addition as shown in FIG. 10-13 (G), even if the set value suggestion effect setting process is executed on the condition that the number of additions is a predetermined number (for example, 40) or more. Good. It should be noted that the set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed at the timing when the condition is satisfied, or at a timing other than the timing when the condition is satisfied (for example, the waiting time for passing through the gate after the end of the special effect, after passing through the gate). The set value suggestion effect setting process may be executed during the jackpot game state, etc.).

It should be noted that the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect executed in the feature unit 014SH is shown in FIG. 10-44.
It may be different from the production mode of the setting value suggestion effect shown in. For example, Figure 10-4
FIG. 1 is not the predetermined character image 044IW001 to 044IW003 or the like shown in FIG.
An image of the character shown in 1-10 (H) or the like may be used.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and
An advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display.
A special state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the advantageous state when the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and
As the game state in which the variable display is executed, a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the game value is easily given by the special state, and a special state control means.
With
It is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative identification information corresponding to either the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.
In the special state, the variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is executed. In this case, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is started, the display result of the variable display to be started is not set as the specific display result. the other hand, it is possible and the child to the special display results,
In the special state, the variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is executed. , A special suggestion that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the special display result. It is possible to perform the production,
The special effect is executed in the special state by suggesting the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decorative identification information among the first identification information and the second identification information is derived and displayed. Be done,
A game machine characterized by that.

Images